Yamaha RX V1900 Owner's Manual U

User Manual: Yamaha RX-V1900 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 146 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
- Connections
- Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Controls diagram

RX-V1900

Printed in Malaysia WP38590

RX-V1900

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V1900_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, June 20, 2008 11:23 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Caution-i En

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

Caution-ii En

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

Caution-iii En

1To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press AMASTER ON/OFF to

release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the

main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC

power plug from the AC wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:

................................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can

cause hearing loss.

22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the

same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are

incorrectly replaced.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by AMASTER ON/OFF. In

this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION APPENDIX English

Features ................................................................... 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Notice ....................................................................... 4

Getting started ........................................................ 5

Quick start guide .................................................... 6

Connections ........................................................... 10

Optimizing the speaker setting for your

listening room.................................................... 30

Before starting the automatic setup ......................... 30

Basic automatic setup .............................................. 30

Advanced automatic setup....................................... 33

Reloading the automatic setup parameters .............. 34

Playback ................................................................ 35

Basic procedure ....................................................... 35

Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 36

Selecting the multi-channel input component ......... 36

Using your headphones............................................ 36

Muting the audio output........................................... 37

Displaying the input source information

(SIGNAL INFO) ................................................. 37

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 38

Sound field programs ........................................... 39

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 39

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode............................... 45

Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 45

Using audio features ............................................. 46

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 46

Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 46

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 46

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 47

Overview.................................................................. 47

FM/AM tuning operations ....................................... 47

Preset FM/AM stations ............................................ 48

Using HD Radio™ features

(U.S.A. model only)........................................... 50

Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs ................... 50

Displaying HD Radio™ information....................... 51

XM® Satellite Radio tuning ................................. 52

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 52

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 53

XM Satellite Radio operations................................. 53

Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 55

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 56

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning......................... 57

Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 57

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription.. 58

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations ...................... 58

Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset

channels ............................................................... 60

Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 61

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

information .......................................................... 62

Using iPod™.......................................................... 63

Controlling iPod™................................................... 63

Using Bluetooth™ components ............................65

Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver and your

Bluetooth component .......................................... 65

Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 65

Advanced sound configurations...........................66

Selecting decoders ................................................... 66

Changing sound field parameter settings................. 67

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........74

Operating the MANUAL SETUP menu.................. 74

1 SPEAKER MENU................................................ 75

2 VOLUME MENU ................................................ 77

3 SOUND MENU.................................................... 78

4 VIDEO MENU ..................................................... 80

5 INPUT MENU...................................................... 81

6 OPTION MENU................................................... 83

Saving and recalling the system settings

(SYSTEM MEMORY)......................................86

Saving the system settings ....................................... 86

Loading the system settings..................................... 87

Using examples........................................................ 88

Remote control features........................................89

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 89

Setting remote control codes ................................... 91

Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 93

Changing source names in the display window....... 94

Macro programming features .................................. 95

Clearing configurations ........................................... 97

Simplified remote control ........................................ 98

Using multi-zone configuration............................99

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ..... 99

Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 100

Advanced setup....................................................102

Using the advanced setup menu ............................ 102

Troubleshooting...................................................104

Resetting the system............................................115

Glossary................................................................116

Sound field program information......................119

Parametric equalizer information .....................120

Specifications .......................................................121

SET MENU tree ..................................................123

Index .....................................................................125

(at the end of this manual)

Front panel................................................................i

Remote control ....................................................... ii

Sound output in each sound field program......... iii

List of remote control codes ...................................v

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX

“AMASTER ON/OFF” or “3DVD” (example) indicates

the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.

Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this

manual for the information about each position of the parts.

2 En

By configuring the parameters in “MANUAL SETUP”, you can adjust a variety of system settings suited for your

listening environment. The following is a brief description of some of the useful menus you can configure in “MANUAL

SETUP”. For more detailed information, see “Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)” (page 74) and “SET MENU

tree” (page 123).

Fine adjusting the speaker settings

In case speaker settings configured by automatic setup

does not match your listening environment, you can

configure them manually.

SPEAKER MENU → CONFIG (page 75)

SPEAKER MENU → LEVEL (page 76)

SPEAKER MENU → DISTANCE (page 76)

Specifying the muting type

In case you do not want to fully mute audio when you

receive a call while watching your favorite TV program,

you can use this menu to specify the muting level.

VOLUME MENU → MUTING TYPE (page 78)

Specifying the initial volume level

By adjusting this parameter, you can automatically control

the initial volume level regardless of the recording level of

the audio source.

VOLUME MENU → INIT. VOL. (page 78)

Adjusting the dynamic range

The dynamic range is the difference between the

minimum and maximum amplitude. The higher the

dynamic range, the more accurate the sound reproduction

for bitstream signals. You can adjust the dynamic range

for speakers and headphones individually.

SOUND MENU → DYNAMIC RANGE (page 79)

Adjusting the audio and video synchronization

Sometimes, depending on your video source component,

video is delayed relative to audio due to processing

problems. In this case, you need to manually adjust the

audio delay to keep it synchronized with the video. If you

connect the video source component to this unit using an

HDMI connection and your component supports the

LIPSYNC feature, you can adjust the audio/video

synchronization automatically.

SOUND MENU → LIPSYNC (page 79)

Changing input/output assignment

In case the initial input/output assignments do not

correspond to your needs, you can rearrange them

according to your component to be connected to this unit.

You can also edit the input name to be displayed in the

front panel or in the OSD as necessary.

INPUT MENU → (input source) → I/O ASSIGNMENT

(page 82)

INPUT MENU → (input source) INPUT RENAME

(page 82)

Fixing the volume difference between input

sources

The sound output level may vary depending on the audio

source components connected to this unit. In this case, you

can reduce or increase the output level of each input

source using this feature.

INPUT MENU → (input source) → VOL. TRIM

(page 82)

Setting the background video for audio sources

If you want to enjoy video images in combination with

music playback or radio, configure this setting to specify

the video input source. For example, to view DVD video

images while listening to the FM radio, set this setting

under “TUNER” to “DVD”.

INPUT MENU → (input source) → BGV (page 82)

Adjusting the brightness of the front panel

display

You can make the front panel display darker or brighter by

configuring this setting.

OPTION MENU → DISPLAY SET → DIMMER

(page 83)

Turning on or off the short message display

Each time you operate this unit using controls on the front

panel or remote control keys, this unit displays short

messages on the OSD. If you want to turn off the short

message display, select “OFF” in this setting (Initial

factory setting is “ON”).

OPTION MENU → DISPLAY SET → SHORT

MESSAGE (page 84)

Setting the amount of time to display OSD

information

You can set the amount of time to display HD Radio

(U.S.A. model only), XM Satellite Radio, or SIRIUS

Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the OSD after

you perform a certain operation.

OPTION MENU → DISPLAY SET → ON SCREEN

(page 84)

Protecting the setup values

After you have configured the sound field program

parameters and other system settings, you can use this

feature to prevent accidental changes to those setup

values.

OPTION MENU → MEMORY GUARD (page 84)

What you can do with MANUAL SETUP

FEATURES

3 En

INTRODUCTION English

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆Minimum RMS output power

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)

Front: 130 W + 130 W

Center: 130 W

Surround: 130 W + 130 W

Surround back: 130 W + 130 W

Various input/output connectors

◆HDMI (IN x 4, OUT x 1), Component video (IN x 3, OUT x

1), S-video (IN x 6, OUT x 3), Composite video (IN x 6, OUT

x 3), Coaxial digital audio (IN x 3), Optical digital audio (IN x

5, OUT x 2), Analog audio (IN x 10, OUT x 3)

◆Speaker out (7-channel), Pre out (7-channel), Subwoofer out,

Presence out, Zone 2/Zone 3 out

◆Discrete multi-channel input (6 or 8-channel)

Sound field programs

◆Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound

fields

◆CINEMA DSP 3D

◆Compressed Music Enhancer mode

◆Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆SILENT CINEMA

Digital audio decoders

◆Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder

◆DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

decoder

◆Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder

◆Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx

decoder

◆DTS NEO:6 decoder

◆Neural-THX Surround decoder

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

◆SRS Circle Surround II decoder (U.S.A. model only)

Sophisticated FM/AM tuner

◆40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆Automatic preset tuning

Radio tuners

◆FM/AM tuning capability

◆HD Radio™ digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A.

model only)

◆XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using XM Mini-Tuner

and Home Dock, sold separately)

◆SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning capability (using

SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately)

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or

high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio

based on HDMI version 1.3a (HDMI is licensed by HDMI

Licensing, LLC.)

– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)

information capability

– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability

– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability

– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals

capability

– High definition digital audio format signals capability

◆HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System)

licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.

◆Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion

(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI

digital video) capability for monitor out

◆Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or

480p/576p to 720p, 1080i or 1080p

DOCK terminal

◆DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold

separately)

Automatic speaker setup features

◆Advanced YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic

Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup

◆Multi-point measurement feature for multiple listening

positions

◆Parametric equalizer select feature

Other features

◆192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize

this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system

◆Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from

480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p

◆Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources

◆Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability

◆Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability

◆Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and

macro capability

◆ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility

◆Zone switching capability between the main zone and

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS

◆SYSTEM MEMORY capability for saving and recalling

multiple system parameter settings

◆Sleep timer for each zone

Check that you received all of the following parts.

❏Remote control

❏Simplified remote control

(except Europe model)

❏Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4)

❏Power cable (Two for Asia model)

❏Optimizer microphone

❏AM loop antenna

❏Indoor FM antenna

❏Speaker terminal wrench

Features

Supplied accessories

NOTICE

4 En

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:

5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535

& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a

registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM

Satellite Radio Inc.

This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio

Corporation and THX Ltd. YAMAHA CORPORATION hereby

grants the user a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of

use to this product under U.S.A. and foreign patent, patent

pending and other technology or trademarks owned by Neural

Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural Surround”, “Neural

Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are trademarks and logos owned by

Neural Audio Corporation. THX is a trademark of THX Ltd.,

which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights

reserved.

the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From

iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and

the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital

Corp.

Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and the

symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.

Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity and TruBass technologies are

incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

Notice

About this manual

•y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the

buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote

control. In case the button names differ between the front

panel and the remote control, the button name on the

remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the

manual and product, the product has priority.

•“

AMASTER ON/OFF” or “3DVD” (example)

indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the

remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at

the end of this manual for the information about each

position of the parts.

iPod

GETTING STARTED

5 En

INTRODUCTION English

■Installing batteries in the remote control

1Take off the battery compartment cover.

2Insert the four supplied batteries

(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control decreases.

– the transmit indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code

and program any acquired functions that may have been

cleared.

■VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

Getting started

Notes

Caution

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE

plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.

Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may

cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire

hazard.

Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or

counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight

slot screwdriver.

Voltages are as follows:

........................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

230-

240V

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

Voltage indication

QUICK START GUIDE

6 En

The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.

In these steps, you need the following supplied

accessories.

❏Power cable

The following items are not included in the package of this

unit.

❏Speakers

❏Front speaker ..................................... x 2

❏Center speaker ................................... x 1

❏Surround speaker .............................. x 4

Select magnetically shielded speakers. The

minimum required speakers are two front speakers.

The priority of the requirement of other speakers is

as follows:

1. Two surround speakers

2. One center speaker

3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)

❏Active subwoofer ................................... x 1

Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA

input jack.

❏Speaker cable ......................................... x 7

❏Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1

Select a monaural RCA cable.

❏DVD player .............................................. x 1

Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital

audio output jack and composite video output

jack.

❏Video monitor .......................................... x 1

Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector

equipped with a composite video input jack.

❏Video cable ............................................. x 2

Select RCA composite video cables.

❏Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1

Quick start guide

Front right

speaker

Subwoofer

Surround back

right speaker

Surround left

speaker

Front left

speaker

Surround back left

speaker

Surround right

speaker

Center

speaker

Video monitor

DVD player

Enjoy DVD playback!

Step 1: Set up your speakers

☞

P. 7

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

Step 3: Turn on the power and

start playback

☞

P. 8

☞

P. 9

Preparation: Check the items

Quick start guide

7 En

INTRODUCTION English

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

1Place your speakers and subwoofer in the

room.

2Connect speaker cables to each speaker.

3Connect each speaker cable to the

corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.

1Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are

unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

2Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables

together to prevent short circuits.

3Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.

4Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal

part of this unit.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel

(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Front speakers and center speaker

Surround and surround back speakers

4Connect the subwoofer cable to the

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and

the input jack of the subwoofer.

Step 1: Set up your speakers

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

HOLDER

WRENCH

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

CD TV

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

SIRIUS

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVDDVR

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD CBL/

SAT MD/

CD-R

DVD DVR

OPTICAL

987

321

SB(8CH)

DVD

(REC)

(PLAY)

IN OUT

CD-R

MD/

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

MONITOR OUT

OUT

DVR

CBL/

SAT

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

OUT

A B C

+++

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT Speaker terminals

12 3 4

To the front left

speaker

To the front right

speaker

Loosen Insert

Speaker terminal wrench

To the center

speaker

Tighten

To the surround

back

right speaker

To the surround

back left

speaker

To the surround right

speaker

To the surround left

speaker

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Input jack

AV receiverSubwoofer

Subwoofer cable

Quick start guide

8 En

1Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the

digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD

player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL

jack of this unit.

2Connect the video cable to the composite

video output jack of your DVD player and

DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.

3Connect the video cable to the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video

input jack of your video monitor.

4Connect the supplied power cable to this unit

and then plug of the power cable and other

components into the AC wall outlet.

For details about connecting the power cable, see page 25.

■For other connections

• Other speaker combinations ☞ P. 13

• Information on jacks and cable plugs ☞ P. 16

• Information on HDMI™ ☞ P. 17

• TV monitor or projector ☞ P. 19

• Other components ☞ P. 20

• External amplifier ☞ P. 22

• Multi-format player or external

decoder ☞ P. 23

• Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ☞ P. 23

• FM/AM antennas ☞ P. 24

• XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ☞ P. 52

• SiriusConnect tuner ☞ P. 57

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

HOLDER

WRENCH

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

CD TV

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

SIRIUS

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVDDVR

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD CBL/

SAT MD/

CD-R

DVD DVR

OPTICAL

987

321

SB(8CH)

DVD

(REC)

(PLAY)

IN OUT

CD-R

MD/

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

MONITOR OUT

OUT

DVR

CBL/

SAT

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

OUT

A B C

+++

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

Make sure that this unit and the DVD

player are unplugged from the AC

wall outlets.

VIDEO MONITOR OUTDVD VIDEO

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

Digital coaxial

audio output

jack Digital coaxial audio

cable DVD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL jack

DVD player AV receiver

Composite video

output jack Video cable

DVD VIDEO jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Video monitor AV receiver

Video cable VIDEO MONITOR

OUT jack

Video input jack

Quick start guide

9 En

INTRODUCTION English

1Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2Press AMASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position on the front panel.

3Rotate the CINPUT selector to set the input

source to “DVD”.

4Start playback of the desired DVD on your

player.

5Rotate QVOLUME to adjust the volume.

6To set this unit to the standby mode, press B

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF.

For details about turning on/off this unit and the standby

mode, see page 26.

■For other operations

• Optimizing the speaker parameters

automatically ☞ P. 30

• Basic playback operations ☞ P. 35

• Sound field programs ☞ P. 39

• Pure high-fidelity sounds ☞ P. 46

• FM/AM radio tuning ☞ P. 47

• XM Satellite Radio tuning ☞ P. 52

• SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ☞ P. 57

• iPod playback ☞ P. 63

• Bluetooth component playback ☞ P. 65

Step 3: Turn on the power and start

playback

Check the type of the connected speakers.

If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER

IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (page 26).

You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers

(page 102).

10 En

• The TRIGGER OUT jacks are control expansion terminals for

custom installation.

• The RS-232C terminal is a control expansion terminal for

factory use only. Consult your dealer for details.

Connections

Rear panel

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

HOLDER

WRENCH

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

REMOTE

PHONO

GND

CD TV

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DOCK

SIRIUS

DIGITAL INPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

PRE OUT

TRIGGER OUT

RS-232C

DIGITAL OUTPUT

ZONE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVDDVR

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD CBL/

SAT MD/

CD-R

DVD DVR

OPTICAL

987

321

SB(8CH)

DVD

(REC)

(PLAY)

IN OUT

CD-R

MD/

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

MONITOR OUT

OUT

DVR

CBL/

SAT

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

OUT

A B C

+++

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

AB09

2314567

Name Page

1HDMI jacks 17

2COMPONENT VIDEO jacks 16

3Audio component jacks 16

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks 23, 99

4Video component jacks 16

5ANTENNA terminals 24

6VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

7AC IN 25

AC OUTLET(S) 25

8DOCK terminal 23

9XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 52

SIRIUS jack

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

0DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks 16

ATRIGGER OUT jacks —

BRS-232C terminal —

CMULTI CH INPUT jacks 23

PRE OUT jacks 22

ZONE OUT jacks 99

Speaker terminals 13

WRENCH HOLDER 15

Notes

Name Page

11 En

Connections

PREPARATION English

The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend.

• 7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended for playback of the high definition digital audio sources (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD

Master Audio, etc.) with sound field programs.

• We recommend that you add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program.

7.1-channel speaker layout

6.1-channel speaker layout

5.1-channel speaker layout

Placing speakers

SBR

SBL

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

30 cm (12 in) or more

60˚

30˚

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

60˚

30˚

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

12 En

Connections

■Speaker types

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system.

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds.

For 5.1-channel speaker layout, place these speakers

farther back compared with the placement in the 7.1-

channel speaker layout.

Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and

SBR)/Surround back speaker (SB)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back

transitions.

For 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and

right channel signals are mixed down and output at the

single surround back speaker by configuring the “SUR.B

L/R SP” setting (page 76).

For 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and

right channel signals are output at the surround left and

right speakers by configuring the “SUR.B L/R SP” setting

(page 76).

Subwoofer (SW)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as

the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high

fidelity sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel

included in bitstreams and multi-channel PCM sources.

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better

to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it

slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall

reflections.

■Presence left and right speakers (PL and

PR)

The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound

field programs (page 39). We recommend that you use the

presence speakers especially for the CINEMA DSP sound

field programs. To use the presence speakers, connect the

speakers to SP1 speaker terminals and then set

“PRESENCE SP” to “YES” (page 76).

For other speaker combinations

You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field

programs by using a speaker combination other than

the 7.1/6.1/5.1-channel speaker combinations.

Use the automatic setup feature (pages 30) or set the

“SPEAKER MENU” parameters (page 75) to output

the surround sounds at the connected speakers.

PRPL

FL 1.8 m (6 ft)

0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)

1.8 m (6 ft)

13 En

Connections

PREPARATION English

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.

• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the

plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit

automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field

programs.

■7.1-channel speaker connection

Connecting speakers

Caution

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (page 26).

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (page 26).

You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (page 102).

Notes

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

+++

Front speakers

Surround speakers

Presence speakers

(page 12) or

Zone 2/Zone 3

speakers

(page 99)

Subwoofer Left

Center speaker

Surround back speakers

Right

Left

Right

Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers

(page 99)

14 En

Connections

■6.1-channel speaker connection

■5.1-channel speaker connection

Surround back speaker

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

++ +

Front speakers

Surround speakers

Presence speakers

(page 12) or

Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers

(page 99)

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Left

Right

Zone 2/Zone 3

speakers

(page 99)

SPEAKERS

CENTER

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

FRONT

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SINGLE

SP2

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

+++

Front speakers

Surround speakers

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Left

Right

Zone 2/Zone 3

speakers

(page 99)

Front speakers for the

bi-amplification

connections

(page 15)

Presence speakers

(page 12) or

Zone 2/Zone 3 speakers

(page 99)

15 En

Connections

PREPARATION English

■Connecting the speaker cable

1Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist the exposed wires of the

cable together to prevent short circuits.

2Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker

terminal wrench, insert one bare wire into the

hole and then tighten the knob.

3Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto

WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this

unit when not in use.

■Connecting to the SP2 speaker

terminals

Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals

(page 99).

Open the tab, insert one bare wire into the hole

and then close the tab.

■Connecting the banana plug

(Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea

models)

Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker

terminal wrench and then insert the banana plug

into the end of the terminal.

You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker

terminals. Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the

hole on the terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the

banana plug.

■Using bi-amplification connections

You can make bi-amplification connections to one speaker

system which supports bi-amplification connection as

shown below. To activate the connections, configure the

“BI-AMP” setting (page 103).

When you make the conventional connection with the speakers,

make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals of the

speakers appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the

speakers for details.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Loosen Insert

Speaker terminal wrench

Tighten

Open the tab Insert Close the tab

Caution

Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to

separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)

crossovers.

Note

Banana plug

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

FRONT

SINGLE

SURROUND

+ +

This unit

LeftRight

Front speakers

16 En

Connections

This unit has three types of audio jacks, three types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection

method depending on the component to be connected.

■Audio jacks

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the

COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals

input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are

compatible with up to 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

■Video jacks

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and

chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate

wires of S-video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component video signals, separated into the

luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals

transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

This unit is equipped with the video conversion function.

(page 18)

Information on jacks and cable plugs

Note

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

(Red)(White) (Orange)

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPR

Composite

video cable

plug

S-video

cable plug

Component

video cable

plugs

(Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)

17 En

Connections

PREPARATION English

This unit has four HDMI input jacks and one HDMI output jack for digital audio and video signal input/output.

■HDMI jack and cable plug

• We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI

cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo

printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI

connection (page 37).

• This unit is equipped with the video conversion function

(page 18).

• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of

the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of

this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt

playback or cause noise.

• The HDMI OUT jack outputs the audio signals input at the

HDMI input jacks only.

• If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT

jack via a DVI connection, the connection may fail.

■HDMI signal compatibility with this unit

Audio signals

• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio

signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio

sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the

following connections:

– multi-channel analog audio input (page 23)

– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)

• Refer to the instruction manuals of the input source component,

and set the component appropriately.

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video

and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of

the DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• To decode the audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input

source component appropriately so that the component outputs

the audio bitstream signals directly (does not decode the

bitstream signals on the component).

• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features

(for example, the special audio contents downloaded via

Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play

back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD

contents.

Video signals

This unit is compatible with the video signals of the

following resolutions:

– 480i/60 Hz

– 576i/50 Hz

– 480p/60 Hz

– 576p/50 Hz

– 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

– 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24Hz

Compatibility with Deep Color and x.v.Color

video signals

This unit accepts Deep Color (30 or 36-bit) and x.v.Color

video signals. To output those video signals from the

HDMI OUT jack without any processing, set “HDMI

RES.” to “THRGH” (page 81).

If the video monitor is not compatible with Deep Color or

x.v.Color video signals, the video source may not be played

back correctly.

■Default input assignment of HDMI input

jacks

Information on HDMI™

Notes

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

media

2ch Linear

PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch

Linear PCM

8ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch,

2.8224 MHz,1 bit

SACD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital,

DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High

definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD,

Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master

Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution

Audio

Blu-ray Disc,

HD DVD, etc.

HDMI

HDMI cable plug

Notes

Note

HDMI input jack Assigned input source

IN1 BD/HD DVD

IN2 DVD

IN3 CBL/SAT

IN4 DVR

18 En

Connections

■Audio signal flow

Only the HDMI input jacks support DSD, Dolby TrueHD,

Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio and DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio signal inputs.

■Video signal flow

• To set the video conversion or change other video settings,

configure the “VIDEO MENU” parameters (page 80).

• If different analog video signals are input concurrently, the

following priority order will be applied.

(1) COMPONENT VIDEO, (2) S VIDEO, (3) VIDEO.

Audio and video signal flow

Note

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

HDMI

AUDIO

OutputInput

Analog

Digital

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

OutputInput

Video

conversion

19 En

Connections

PREPARATION English

If you turn off the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT

jack via a DVI connection, the connection may fail. In this case,

the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.

To select the types of the audio signals output at the HDMI

OUT jack, configure the “HDMI AUDIO” setting (page 80).

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

Note

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DIGITAL INPUT

MONITOR OUT

OUT

PRPBVS

L R O

(or projector)

Optical outComponent video in

Video in

Audio out

S-video in

HDMI in

Recommended connections Alternative connections

20 En

Connections

■Connecting audio and video components

This unit has three types of audio jacks, three types of video jacks and HDMI jacks. You can choose the connection

method depending on the component to be connected.

HDMI can transmit both digital audio and video over a single HDMI cable.

Connection example (connecting a DVD player)

Connecting other components

VIDEO

PHONO

GND

CD TV

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

AUDIO

DVD DVR

COAXIAL

BD/

HD DVD CBL/

SAT MD/

CD-R

DVD DVR

OPTICAL

987

321

DVD

(REC)

(PLAY)

IN OUT

CD-R

MD/

BD/HD DVD

VCR

DVR

CBL/SAT

OUT OUT

ININ

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVR

CBL/

SAT

DVD

BD/

HD DVD

A B C

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN1

HDMI jacks

COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO S VIDEO

AUDIO COAXIAL OPTICAL

Video jacks

Audio jacks

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

DVD

COAXIAL

DVD

OPTICAL

DVD

IN2

L R

PRPBY

DVD player

HDMI out

Coaxial out

Component out

S-video

out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out

Recommended

connections

Alternative

connections

21 En

Connections

PREPARATION English

Jacks used for audio and video connections

Recommended connections are indicated by boldface. When connecting a recording component, you need to make

additional connections for recording (signal transmission from this unit to the recording component).

You can also use the VIDEO AUX jacks (page 24) on the front panel to connect an additional component.

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

Component Signal type

Jacks to connect

On component On this unit

Blu-ray Disc or HD

DVD player

Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN1 (BD/HD DVD)

Audio Optical out OPTICAL (BD/HD DVD)

Audio out (analog) AUDIO (BD/HD DVD)

Video Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)

S-video out S VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)

Video out (composite) VIDEO (BD/HD DVD)

DVD player Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN2 (DVD)

Audio Optical out OPTICAL (DVD)

Coaxial out COAXIAL (DVD)

Audio out (analog) AUDIO (DVD)

Video Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (DVD)

S-video out S VIDEO (DVD)

Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVD)

Set-top box Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN3 (CBL/SAT)

Audio Optical out OPTICAL (CBL/SAT)

Audio out (analog) AUDIO (CBL/SAT)

Video Component out COMPONENT VIDEO (CBL/SAT)

S-video out S VIDEO (CBL/SAT)

Video out (composite) VIDEO (CBL/SAT)

DVD recorder Audio/Video HDMI out HDMI IN4 (DVR)

Audio Coaxial out COAXIAL (DVR)

Audio out (analog) AUDIO (DVR IN)

Video S-video out S VIDEO (DVR IN)

Video out (composite) VIDEO (DVR IN)

Audio recording Optical in OPTICAL (DVR)

Audio in (analog) AUDIO (DVR OUT)

Video recording S-video in S VIDEO (DVR OUT)

Video in (composite) VIDEO (DVR OUT)

22 En

Connections

• Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV if the video conversion is disabled. For example, if you

connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect other components to the VIDEO jacks.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

• If you connect your DVD player to both the OPTICAL and COAXIAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL

jack.

• OSD signals are not output at the DVR OUT and VCR OUT jacks and cannot be recorded.

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default one assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack, configure the “I/O ASSIGNMENT” setting (page 82).

• When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jack, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head

amplifier.

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal.

■Connecting an external amplifier

This unit has more than enough power for any home use.

However, if you want to add more power to the speaker

output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an

external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT

jack outputs the same channel signals as the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not

make any connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. [1] CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel output jack.

[2] FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel output jacks.

[3] SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel output jacks.

VCR Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (VCR IN)

Video S-video out S VIDEO (VCR IN)

Video out (composite) VIDEO (VCR IN)

Audio recording Audio in (analog) AUDIO (VCR OUT)

Video recording S-video in S VIDEO (VCR OUT)

Video in (composite) VIDEO (VCR OUT)

CD player Audio Coaxial out COAXIAL (CD)

Audio out (analog) AUDIO (CD)

MD or CD recorder Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (MD/CD-R IN)

Audio recording Optical in OPTICAL (MD/CD-R)

Audio in (analog) AUDIO (MD/CD-R OUT)

Turnta ble Audio Audio out (analog) AUDIO (PHONO)

Notes

Component Signal type

Jacks to connect

On component On this unit

Notes

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND

PRESENCE

SUR.BACK/

SINGLE(SB)

[1] [2]

[5]

[3] [4]

23 En

Connections

PREPARATION English

[4] SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks

Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When

you only connect one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack.

• To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set

“PRESENCE SP“ to “NONE” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to any

parameter except “NONE” (page 76).

• To output presence channel signals at these jacks, set

“PRESENCE SP“ to “YES” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to “NONE”

(page 76).

[5] SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.

■Connecting a multi-format player or an

external decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a

multi-format player, external decoder, etc. If you set

“INPUT CH” to “8ch” (page 83), the analog audio input

jacks assigned as “FRONT” can be used as the front

channel input jacks.

• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital

sound field processor is automatically disabled.

• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at

least a 5.1-channel speaker system when using this feature.

* The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in

“MULTI CH” (page 83).

■Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal

dock or Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver

This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear

panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately).

Connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth

receiver to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this

unit using its dedicated cable.

■Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

When the components are the Yamaha products and have

the capability of the transmission of the remote control

signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT

jack to the remote control input and output jack with the

monaural analog mini cable as follows.

Notes

MULTI CH INPUT

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

CENTER

FRONT(6CH)

SURROUND

SB(8CH)

TAPE

MD/

(C)

()

LR LRLR

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Front out (8ch)

Subwoofer out

Center out

Surround out

Front out (6ch)

Surround back

out (8ch)

DOCK

Yamaha iPod universal dock or

Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver

REMOTE

OUT

Yamaha

component

(CD or DVD

player, etc.)

Remote

control in

Remote

control out

Infrared signal

receiver or

Yamaha

component

24 En

Connections

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console or a video camera to this unit. To reproduce

the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as

the input source.

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength.

• The types of the supplied antennas and the FM antenna terminal

of this unit are different depending on the models.

• (Asia and General models only) Be sure to set the tuner

frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area

(page 103).

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor

antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or

service center about outdoor antennas.

Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the

front panel

Caution

Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other

components before making connections.

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROLSELECT

AUDIO TONE

ENTER

ON/OFF

OPTICAL

AUDIO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

Game console or

video camera

S-Video output

Video output

Audio

output

Optical output

Connecting the FM and AM

antennas

Notes

ANTENNA

GND

75Ω UNBAL.

Indoor FM

antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

AM loop

antenna

(supplied)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft)

vinyl-covered wire extended

outdoors from a window.

25 En

Connections

PREPARATION English

Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna

(U.S.A. model)

Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna

The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity

and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND

terminal.

■Connecting the AC power cable

Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after

all other connections are complete, then plug the AC

power cable into an AC wall outlet.

(Asia model only) Select one of the supplied power cables

suitable for the type of AC wall outlet in your location before

plugging this unit into the AC wall outlet.

■AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet

Korea model ............................................................... None

Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets

Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the power cable of your other

components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is

supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to

these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For

information on the maximum power or the total power

consumption of the components that can be connected to

these outlet(s), see “Specifications” (page 121).

Press and hold Insert Release

Connecting the power cable

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.

AC IN

AC OUTLETS

To the AC wall outlet

26 En

Connections

1Make sure this unit is turned off.

2Press and hold OSTRAIGHT on the front

panel and then press AMASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select

“SPEAKER IMP.”.

4Press OSTRAIGHT repeatedly to select

“6Ω MIN”.

5Press AMASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to save the new

setting and turn off this unit.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

■Turning on this unit

Press AMASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

inward to the ON position.

When you turn on this unit by pressing AMASTER ON/

OFF, the main zone is turned on.

■Turning off this unit

Press AMASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

again to release it outward to the OFF position.

■Set the main zone to the standby mode

Press

BMAIN ZONE ON/OFF

(or

CSTANDBY

■Turning on the main zone from the

standby mode

Press BMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or DPOWER).

• Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn

off this unit. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small

amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the

remote control.

•BMAIN ZONE ON/OFF, CSTANDBY and DPOWER are

operational only when AMASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward

to the ON position.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few

seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.

Setting the speaker impedance

Caution

If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER

IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this

unit. You can also use 4 ohm speakers as the front

speakers (page 102).

Note

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

Turning this unit on and off

If there are some problems...

• First, turn off and then turn on this unit again.

• If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this

unit (page 115).

27 En

Connections

PREPARATION English

aCSII indicator (U.S.A. model only)

Lights up when the SRS Circle Surround II decoder is

active (page 66).

bneural indicator

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Lights up when the Neural-THX Surround decoder is

active (page 66).

cHeadphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (page 36).

dYPAO indicator

Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the

speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without

any modifications (page 30).

ePRESET indicator

Lights up while this unit is in the preset tuning mode.

fInput source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

The XM and SIRIUS indicators are only applicable to the

U.S.A. and Canada models.

gInput signal indicators

Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct

Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital

audio signals.

hMulti-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

iHDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is

input at one of the HDMI input jacks (page 17).

jENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

turned on (page 44).

kDSP indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound

field programs are selected.

SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a

sound field program is selected (page 44).

CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound

field program (page 39).

3D indicator

Lights up when the CINEMA DSP 3D mode is turned

on (page 45).

VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 44).

lADAPTIVE DRC indicator

Lights up when the adaptive dynamic range control

feature is turned on (page 77).

mDecoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of this unit function.

nTuner indicators

Light up when this unit is in the FM, AM, XM Satellite

Radio, or SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning mode.

Front panel display

VOLUME

TUNED STEREO

AUTO MEMORY

CATEGORY ALL

HOLD

ZONE2

SLEEP

ZONE3

MASTER AUDIO

MATRIX

DISCRETE

SILENT

CINEMA

YPAO PRESET

ENHANCER

VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC

DIGITAL PLUS

TRUE HD

PL x

DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER

XM SIRIUS

L C R

SL LFE SR

SBL SB SBR

neural

DSD

PCM

VOLUME

TUNED STEREO

AUTO MEMORY

CATEGORY ALL

HOLD

ZONE2

SLEEP

ZONE3

L C R

SL LFE SR

SBL SB SBR

MASTER AUDIO

MATRIX

DISCRETE

SILENT

CINEMA

ENHANCER

VIRTUAL ADAPTIVE DRC

DIGITAL PLUS

TRUE HD

PL x

bc da e f

Note

28 En

Connections

The HD indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. model only

and lights up when this unit is turned into the HD Radio

reception band.

oMenu browsing indicator

Lights up if any items exist under the current item during

menu browsing for iPod, etc.

pSLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (page 38).

qVOLUME level indicator

• Indicates the current volume level.

• Flashes while the mute function is on (page 37).

rInput channel and speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

• Indicate the channel components of the current

digital input signal.

• Light up or flash according to the settings of the

speakers when this unit is in the automatic setup

procedure (page 30).

Presence speaker indicators

Light up according to setting for “PRESENCE SP”

(page 76) in “CONFIG” when this unit is in the auto

setup procedure (page 30) or the speaker level setting

procedure in the “LEVEL” (page 76).

sZONE2/ZONE3 indicators

Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on

(page 100).

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

Display window (4)

[1] ID1/ID2 indicator

Indicates the currently selected remote control ID

(page 102).

[2] Transmit indicator

Appears while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

[3] Zone indicators

Indicates the currently controlling zone (page 100).

[4] Information display

Shows the name of the selected input source that you

can control.

Infrared window (1)

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

Note

L C R

SL LFE SR

SBL SB SBR

Presence speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

Using the remote control

30 30

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Remote control sensor

MAIN

ZONE 2

ID 2ID 1

ZONE 3

[1] [2]

[3] [4]

29 En

Connections

PREPARATION English

Operation mode selector (E)

The function of some buttons depends on the operation

mode selector position.

AMP

Operates the amplifier function of this unit.

SOURCE

Operates the component selected with an input

selector button (page 90).

Operates the TV (page 89).

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following

conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 91.

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel

door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of

the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these

controls.

Notes

Opening and closing the front

panel door

30 En

This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid

troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment. In addition, the multi-point measurement feature enables you to optimize the setup of this unit for up to

eight listening positions.

1Make sure of the following check points

before starting the automatic setup

operations.

❏Speakers are connected appropriately.

❏Headphones are disconnected from this unit.

❏This unit is turned on.

❏The connected subwoofer is turned on and the

volume level is set to about half way (or slightly

less).

❏The crossover frequency controls of the

connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.

❏The room is sufficiently quiet.

❏Set the operation mode selector on the remote

control to EAMP.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the automatic setup procedure.

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as

possible while the automatic setup procedure is in progress. If

there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

2Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

“MIC ON View OSD MENU” appears in the front

panel display and the “AUTO SETUP” screen

appears on the video monitor.

You can also run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu

that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This

manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the automatic

setup procedure.

3Start the automatic setup.

To optimize the setup of this unit for one listening

position, follow “Basic automatic setup” (page 30).

To optimize the setup of this unit for multiple

listening positions, follow “Advanced automatic

setup” (page 33).

If you have done all the preparations necessary, follow the

procedure below to optimize the setup of this unit for one

listening position.

1Place the optimizer microphone at your

normal listening position on a flat level

surface with the omni-directional

microphone heading upward.

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

Before starting the automatic

setup

Notes

VOLUME

MIN MAX MIN MAX

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

Controls of a subwoofer (example)

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDI O

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROLSELECT

AUDI O TON E

ENTER

Omni-directional

microphone

Basic automatic setup

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

SETUP;;;;;;;;;AUTO

MULTI MEASURE;;;;1

START

Up/Down

Start

Optimizer microphone

31 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION English

It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the

optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears

would be when you are seated in your listening position.

You can use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the

optimizer microphone to the tripod (etc.).

2Check if “START” is selected and then press

8ENTER.

3Press 8ENTER to start the measurement.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker during

the measurement. Once all items are measured,

“Measurement Complete” appears.

• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

• The measurement is canceled if an error occurs (page 32).

4Press 8ENTER to display the result.

Number of the measured points MLT

Displays the number of listening positions actually

measured.

Number of speakers SP

Displays the number of speakers connected to this

unit in the following order:

Front/Back/Subwoofer

Speaker distance DIST

Displays the speaker distance from the listening

position in the following order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance

Speaker level LVL

Displays the speaker output level in the following

order:

Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output

level

“WARNING” and the number of warning messages

appear in the above of “RESULT” if any potential problem

occurs (page 33).

5Press 8ENTER to display the setup results

in detail.

Before proceeding next operation

Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the

automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. For more accurate

measurements, we recommended that you get out of the room

or move to the wall where speakers are not around during the

measurement. It takes approximately 3 minutes.

Notes

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

SETUP;;;;;;;;;AUTO

MULTI MEASURE;;;;1

START

Up/Down

Start

AUTO SETUP

Loud test tones are

output.

Please keep quiet

or leave the room.

Press [ENTER]

AUTO SETUP

Measurement Complete

Press [ENTER]

Note

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

RESULT

MLT : 1

SP : 5/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB

>SET CANCEL

Up/Down

Detail

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

RESULT MULTI MEASURE

Measured at

1 point

Select

Return

32 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

6Press 8l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the setup result displays.

Press 8k / n to toggle between the parameters in the

result.

• If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually

adjust each parameter, use “MANUAL SETUP”

(page 74).

• You can select the parametric equalizer type with “PEQ

SELECT” (page 79).

• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may

be longer than the actual distance depending on the

characteristics of your subwoofer or external amplifiers if

you connect them.

• In the “EQ” results, different values may be set for the

same band to provide finer adjustments.

7Press 8ENTER to return to the top result

display.

8Press 8l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”

and then press 8ENTER.

Choices: SET, CANCEL

• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”

results.

9Disconnect the optimizer microphone or

press HMENU to exit from "SET MENU".

If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your

listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to recalibrate

your system.

■If an error screen appears

Press 8l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and

then press 8ENTER

The following screen is an example where “E-9:USER

CANCEL” appears in the OSD.

Choices: RETRY, EXIT

• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”

procedure.

• If “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can also select “PROCEED” to

Notes

Results of the speaker

connection and wiring

Results of the speaker distance

from the listening position

Results of the speaker detection

and size

Results of the parametric

equalizer of each speaker

Results of the speaker output

level

Number of the measured points

Note

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

RESULT

MLT : 1

SP : 5/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB

>SET CANCEL

Up/Down

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

RESULT

MLT : 1

SP : 5/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB

>SET CANCEL

Up/Down

Enter

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

ERROR

E-9:USER CANCEL

Don't operate

any function

>RETRY EXIT

Select

Enter

33 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

PREPARATION English

ignore the error and carry on the measurement. However, we

recommend that you solve the problem before starting the

measurement.

• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears, you can select only

“EXIT”.

• For details about each error message, see “AUTO SETUP”

(page 113).

■If “WARNING” appears

When this unit detects potential problems during the

automatic setup procedure, “WARNING” appears in the

result screen. Check the warning messages to correct your

speaker settings.

The adjustments are made even if “WARNING” appears,

however they may not be optimal.

1Make sure the pointer is pointing at

“WARNING” and then press 8ENTER to

display the detailed information about the

warning.

The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates

the number of warning messages.

2Press 8l / h repeatedly to toggle between

the warning displays.

• For details about each warning message, see “AUTO

SETUP” (page 113).

• When the corresponding warning message is not

applicable to a speaker, “– – –” is displayed instead.

• If “SWFR:TOO LOW” or “SWFR:TOO HIGH” appears

under “W-3:LEVEL ERROR”, adjust the volume level of

the subwoofer.

3Press 8ENTER to return to the top result

display.

If you have done all the preparations necessary, follow the

procedure below to optimize the setup of this unit for

multiple listening positions.

1Place the optimizer microphone at the first

listening position.

The following illustration shows how to place the

optimizer microphone in order to optimize the setup

of this unit for seven listening positions for example.

1/2/3/4/5/6/7: Listening positions

2Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “MULTI

MEASURE” and then press 8l / h

repeatedly to set the number of the listening

position you want to make the measurement

at.

Choices: 1 (default), 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

3Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “START”

and then press 8ENTER.

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

WARNING (2)

RESULT

MLT : 1

SP : 5/4/0.1

DIST: 14.0/17.0ft

LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB

>SET CANCEL

Up/Down

Detail

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

WARNING

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Reverse channel

FL ---

CENTER

--- PR

SL ---

SBL ---

Select

Return

Advanced automatic setup

1 7

2 6

43 5

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

AUTO SETUP

SETUP;;;;;;;;;AUTO

MULTI MEASURE;;;;7

START

Up/Down

Select

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

AUTO SETUP

SETUP;;;;;;;;;AUTO

MULTI MEASURE;;;;7

START

Up/Down

Start

34 En

Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room

4Press 8ENTER to start the measurement.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker during

the measurement. Once all items for the first listening

position are measured, the following message

appears.

• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any

operation on this unit.

• The measurement is canceled if an error occurs (page 32).

5Move the optimizer microphone to the

second listening position and then press

8ENTER to start the measurement.

To skip the measurements at the remaining listening

positions, press 8n.

6Repeat step 5 until the measurement at all

listening positions are made.

If you have made the measurement at all listening

positions or skipped the measurement at the

remaining listening positions, the following message

appears.

7Follow steps 4 to 10 in “Basic automatic

setup” (page 30) to check the setup result

and exit from “SET MENU”.

In case you are not satisfied with the speaker setup and

sound adjustments made in “MANUAL SETUP”, you can

restore the settings back to the values configured by the

last automatic setup.

If you reload the automatic setup parameters, the settings you

have made in “MANUAL SETUP” are cleared. To save the

settings before reloading the automatic setup parameters, see

“SYSTEM MEMORY” (page 86).

1Set the operation mode selector to EAMP

and then press HMENU.

The top “SET MENU” screen appears in the OSD.

2Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “AUTO

SETUP” and then press 8ENTER.

3Check if “SETUP” is selected and then press

8l / h repeatedly to select “RELOAD”.

4Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “START”

and then press 8ENTER.

The results of the last automatic setup are displayed.

For details about automatic setup results and how to

display the setup results in detail, see “Basic automatic

setup” (page 30).

5Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “SET” and

then press 8ENTER.

The automatic setup parameters are reloaded.

To cancel reloading the automatic setup parameters, press

8l / h repeatedly to select “CANCEL” and then press

8ENTER.

Before proceeding next operation

Once you perform the next operation, this unit starts the

automatic setup procedure in 10 seconds. For more accurate

measurements, we recommended that you get out of the room

or move to the wall where speakers are not around during the

measurement.

Notes

[ENTER]:

[] :

AUTO SETUP

Put the microphone

at 2nd listening

position

Skip

AUTO SETUP

Measurement Complete

Press [ENTER]

Reloading the automatic setup

parameters

Note

35 En

BASIC

OPERATION English

1Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

You can configure the display settings with "VIDEO

MENU" (page 80) and “DISPLAY SET” (page 83).

2Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (3))

The name of the selected input source appears for a

few seconds.

3Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the instruction manuals for the source

component.

• FM/AM radio tuning (page 47)

• XM Satellite Radio tuning (page 52)

• SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning (page 57)

• iPod playback (page 63)

• Bluetooth component playback (page 65)

Rotate

VOLUME

(or press

VOLUME +/–

)

to adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

To adjust the level of each speaker, see page 46.

5Rotate the NPROGRAM selector (or press

one of the sound field program selector

buttons (P) repeatedly) to select the desired

sound field program.

For details about sound field program, see page 39.

To switch the information (current input source, current

sound field program, etc) displayed in the front panel

display, press LINFO (or set the operation mode selector

to EAMP and press BINFO) repeatedly.

Playback

Caution

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play

back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,

you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player

supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound

output level of your CD player before you play back a

CD encoded in DTS.

To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio

connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU”

to “DTS” before the playback (page 82).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to EAMP.

Basic procedure

DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM SIRIUS

DVD

Selected input source

Available input sources

Movie

Sci-Fi

Selected sound field program

Selected sound field program category

36 En

Playback

Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the

input jack assigned to an input source when more than one

jacks are assigned to an input source.

1Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press one

of the input selector buttons (3)) to select

the desired input source.

Press

AUDIO SELECT

(or set the

operation mode to

EAMP

and then press

AUDIO SEL

) repeatedly to select the

desired audio input jack select setting.

You can configure the default audio input jack select setting

with “AUDIO SELECT” (page 84).

This feature is not available if no digital input jack is assigned

to the selected input source in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (page 82).

“HDMI” is available only when an HDMI input jack is

assigned.

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (page 23) as the input source.

Rotate the CINPUT selector on the front panel

to select “MULTI CH” (or press 3MULTI).

You can configure the multi channel input settings with

“MULTI CH” (page 81).

Sound field programs cannot be selected when “MULTI CH” is

selected as the input source.

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo

analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA

mode activates automatically (page 44).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

speaker terminals.

• All digital multi-channel audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, only the

signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are

output.

Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT)

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) HDMI

(2) Digital signals

(3) Analog signals

HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI

signals are not input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.

(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.

When no signals are input, no sound is output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog

signals are input, no sound is output.

Note

DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM SIRIUS

A.SEL: AUTO

Selected audio input jack

select setting

Available input sources

Selecting the multi-channel input

component

Note

Using your headphones

Notes

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROLSELECT

AUDIO TONE

ENTER

ON/OFF

37 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION English

Press KMUTE on the remote control to mute the

audio output. Press KMUTE again to resume

the audio output.

• The VOLUME level indicator flashes while the mute function is

on.

• You can configure the muting level with “MUTING TYPE”

(page 78).

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1Set the operation mode selector to EAMP

and then press HMENU on the remote

control.

The top “SET MENU” screen appears in the OSD.

2Press 8n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL

INFO” and then press 8ENTER.

3Press 8l / h to toggle between the audio

and video information.

4Press HMENU on the remote control again

to exit from “SET MENU”.

■Audio information

• “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding

information.

• Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include

the discrete surround back left and right channel signals but are

encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz.

• Even if you make settings to output bitstreams directly, some

players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus

bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting the

DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams.

■Video information

HDMI error message

Muting the audio output

Displaying the input source

information (SIGNAL INFO)

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;SYSTEM MEMORY

;SIGNAL INFO

Up/Down

Enter

FORMAT Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to

analog input.

SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from

a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input

signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a

multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front

channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per

second.

DIALOG The dialogue normalization level preset to the

current input bitstream signal.

FLAG Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM

signals that cue this unit to automatically

switch decoders.

Notes

HDMI SIGNAL Type of the source video signals and

the video signals output at the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit.

HDMI RES. Resolution of the input signal (analog

or HDMI) and the output signal

(HDMI).

ANALOG RES. Resolution of the source video signals

and the analog video signals output at

the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT

jacks of this unit.

HDMI ERROR

(HDMI MESSAGE)

Error message for HDMI sources or

connected HDMI devices.

Device over The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed.

Out of Res. Out of resolution. The connected

monitor is not compatible with the

resolution of the input video signal.

38 En

Playback

Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (page 25).

Press BSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly

to set the amount of time.

The sleep timer setting changes as shown below.

Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up

in the front panel display, and the display returns to the

selected sound field program.

To cancel the sleep timer

Press BSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to select

“SLEEP OFF”.

If you set the main zone to the standby mode, the sleep timer is

automatically canceled.

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to EAMP.

Using the sleep timer

120min. 90min.

60min.30min.OFF

39 En

BASIC

OPERATION English

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing

(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD and

DTS-HD Master Audio sources.

Rotate the NPROGRAM selector (or set the

operation mode selector to EAMP and then

press one of the sound field selector buttons (P)

repeatedly).

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

• You can select the desired sound field program and setting the

parameters by using the OSD menu (page 67).

• Available sound field parameters and the created sound field

differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this

unit.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (page 36) or when this unit is in the Pure Direct

mode (page 46).

• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field

program, this unit applies the selected program without

activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to

48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.

Sound field programs

Selecting sound field programs

Notes

40 En

Sound field programs

■For audio music sources

For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (page 46), the “STRAIGHT” mode (page 45), or surround

decode mode (page 66).

CLASSICAL

Descriptions of the characteristics of the sound field programs

Following indexes indicates the characteristics and trends of each sound field program.

Size of sound field space (Size)

Indicates the size of the sound field to be generated. If the

value for this item is small, the sound is that of a small

space, while if the value is large, the sound is that of a vast

space.

Vertical/horizontal balance (V/H balance)

Indicates the balance of the vertical (height) and horizontal

directions for the sound field to be generated. If this item is

more in the horizontal direction, the sound is that of a

space with strong reflections from the walls, while if it is

more in the vertical direction, the sound is that of a space

with strong reflections from the ceiling.

Front/rear balance (F/R balance)

A CINEMA DSP sound field processing expressing

whether the effect is stronger towards the front or rear.

When the effect is stronger towards the front, the listener

senses a feeling of openness and depth towards the screen,

while when the effect is stronger towards the rear, the

listener gets a sense of envelopment and movement. Suits

basically all types of contents for programs with a good

front/rear balance, and is effective when selected

appropriately for programs in which the balance is more

towards either the front or rear.

Sound field atmosphere (Atmosphere)

The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to

whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following;

Simple: Sounds that fade straight-forwardly, with a light,

gentle impression, depending on the program. This suits

almost all contents relatively well, but provides little

brilliance or powerfulness.

Complex: Sounds transform in complex ways as they fade

out, with a rich, brilliant impression, depending on the

program.

This is extremely effective for the right contents, but is

suited for a smaller range of contents.

The sound field to be generated is evaluated according to

whether it is nearer to one or the other of the following;

Calm: An overall composed, moderate effect, stressing the

overall quality of the atmosphere without aiming at any

extreme effects. This suits almost all contents relatively

well, but provides little showiness or powerfulness.

Powerful: Designed with specific contents in mind

(expressing vast spaces, feverish excitement, etc.). This is

extremely effective for the right contents, but is suited for a

smaller range of contents.

Hall in Munich

This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500

seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as

normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The

listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall

with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and

ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all

around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.

The characteristics of the sound field programs may differ depending on the settings of the listening room, etc.

Note

Small Large

Vertical Horizontal

Front Rear

Simple Complex

Calm Powerful

CLASSICAL

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

41 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION English

LIVE/CLUB

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle

stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels

freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church

has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow

shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time

and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation

rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the

church.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling

like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations

that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with

the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the

stage located in the corner.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off

the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey

atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound

as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles,

with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the

center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line

This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was

a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people

to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant

sound.

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

LIVE/CLUB

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

Size

V/H balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Simple

Large

Horizontal

Complex

42 En

Sound field programs

■For various sources

ENTERTAIN

■For game programs

ENTERTAIN

■For visual sources of music

ENTERTAIN

Sports

This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts

and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports

broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are

positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the

stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a

feeling of presence in the stadium.

Action Game

This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and

FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range

per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with

a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while

maintaining a clear sense of directions.

Roleplaying Game

This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games.

It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field

design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and spatial

feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround

effects in the movie scenes in the game.

Music Video

This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live

performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge

oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that

emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of

rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that

reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum

level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices.

“Recital/Opera” offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in

front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic

positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround

sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall

effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The

listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera

entertainment.

ENTERTAIN

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

ENTERTAIN

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

ENTERTAIN

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

43 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION English

■For movie sources

You can select the desired decoder (page 66) used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”).

MOVIE

Standard

This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding

feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of

multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been

designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which

the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the

left, right and rear.

Spectacle

This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale

movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field

matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an

excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound

design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring

movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created

virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog,

sound effects and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design

of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains

reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space

expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also

restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio

channels and the clarity of the sound.

Drama

This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide

range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and

comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum

spatial feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music

softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a

way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of

viewing.

Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources

such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie

theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and

reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space

with a certain sound depth.

MOVIE

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

Size

V/H balance

F/R balance

Atmosphere

Small

Vertical

Front

Calm

Large

Horizontal

Rear

Powerful

44 En

Sound field programs

■Stereo playback

STEREO

■For compression artifacts

(Compressed Music Enhancer mode)

ENHANCER

■Surround decoder mode

SUR. DECODE

■Using sound field programs without

surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP sound field programs without surround speakers. It

creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound

field.

When you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (page 76),

Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever

you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program

(page 39).

Virtual CINEMA DSP does not activate in the following cases:

– “MULTI CH“ is selected as the input source (page 36).

– headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

– the unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode (page 44).

■Enjoying multi-channel sources and

sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound through ordinary headphones.

SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you

connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening

to CINEMA DSP sound field programs (page 39). When

activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

SILENT CINEMA does not activate in the following cases:

– “MULTI CH“ is selected as the input source (page 36).

– the unit is in the “2ch Stereo” (page 44), “STRAIGHT”

(page 45) or “Pure Direct” (page 46) mode.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2

channels.

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you

play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the

source to 2 channels, and then output the sound from all

speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal

for background music at parties, etc.

Straight Enhancer

Use this program to improve the sound enhancer nearest to the

original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel

compression artifacts.

7ch Enhancer

Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-

channel stereo.

Surround Decode

Use this program to play back sources with using the desired

surround decoders (page 66).

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR. DECOD

Note

45 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION English

CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and

accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.

You can activate and deactivate the CINEMA DSP 3D

mode.

Press O3D DSP repeatedly to turn on or off the

CINEMA DSP 3D mode.

While this unit is in the CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the 3D

indicator lights up.

CINEMA DSP 3D does not activate (“3D:--“ appears) in the

following cases:

– the “PRESENCE SP” setting is set to “NONE” (page 76).

– no CINEMA DSP is selected.

– headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output from only the front left and right

speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into

the appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

Press OSTRAIGHT (or RSTRAIGHT) to select

“STRAIGHT”.

The names of the audio signal format of the input source

and the active decoder appear in the front panel display.

To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode

Press OSTRAIGHT (or RSTRAIGHT) again or select

another sound field program (page 39).

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to EAMP.

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode

Note

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to EAMP.

Enjoying unprocessed input

sources

46 En

Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound

of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is

activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the

least circuitry.

Press MPURE DIRECT (or MPURE DIRECT)

to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode.

The MPURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up

and the front panel display and OSD automatically turns

off while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode.

• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in

the Pure Direct mode:

– switching the sound field program

– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters

– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)

• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this

unit is turned off.

To make this unit output video signals during the Pure Direct

mode, configure the “PURE DIRECT” setting (page 80).

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front L/R and center speaker channels and the

subwoofer channel.

1Press ETONE CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency

response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency

response (BASS).

2Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to adjust

the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or

the low-frequency response (BASS).

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the

low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and

center speakers and the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the Pure Direct mode

is activated, or when “MULTI CH“ is selected as the input

source.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in

“AUTO SETUP” (page 30) and “LEVEL” (page 76).

1Press BLEVEL and then 8k / n repeatedly

to select the speaker you want to adjust.

The available speaker channels differ depending on the

speaker settings.

2Press 8l / h on the remote control to

adjust the speaker output level.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Using audio features

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to EAMP.

Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

Notes

Adjusting the tonal quality

Notes

Before performing the following operation, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to EAMP.

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

Display Adjusted speaker

FRONT L Front left speaker

CENTER Center speaker

FRONT R Front right speaker

SUR.R Surround right speaker

SB R Surround back right speaker

SB L Surround back left speaker

SUR.L Surround left speaker

SWFR Subwoofer

PRNS L Presence left speaker

PRNS R Presence right speaker

47 En

BASIC

OPERATION English

You can use two tuning modes to tune into the desired

FM/AM station:

Frequency tuning mode

You can search or specify the frequency of the desired

FM/AM station automatically or manually (see “FM/AM

tuning operations” on this page).

Preset tuning mode

You can preset the desired FM/AM station in advance, and

then recall the station by specifying the preset group and

number (see “Recalling a preset station” on page 49).

Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best

reception.

1Press KBAND (or 7BAND) to select the

desired reception band.

2If the PRESET indicator in the front panel

lights up, press ISEARCH MODE (or

HSRCH MODE) to turn it off.

3To search the station automatically, press

and hold GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

press 8PRESET/CH k / n) for about 2

seconds. To search the station manually,

press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

repeatedly.

• To tune into a higher frequency, press Gh (or

8k).

• To tune into a lower frequency, press Gl (or

8n).

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

search the station manually or enter the frequency directly

(page 47).

• When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up.

• To switch the information (current input source, current

sound field program, etc) displayed in the front panel

display, press LINFO (or set the operation mode to

EAMP and then press BINFO) repeatedly.

• To switch between stereo or monaural FM reception, press

JSTEREO/MONO (or NAUDIO).

• (U.S.A. model only)

If this unit is tuned into an HD Radio station (page 50), the

HD indicator lights up in the front panel display.

■Direct frequency tuning

Use this feature tune into the desired station directly by

entering the frequency.

1Follow steps 1 and 2 in “FM/AM tuning

operations” (page 47) to select the desired

reception band.

2Enter the frequency of the desired station by

pressing the numeric buttons (A).

Example: To tune into 103.7 MHz

If the entered frequency is out of the range of the FM/AM

tuning, “WRONG STATION!” appears in the front panel

display.

FM/AM tuning

Overview

Note

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE and then

press 3TUNER.

FM/AM tuning operations

FM 88.9MHz

PRESET turns off

Note

1 0 3 7

48 En

FM/AM tuning

Use this feature to store up to 40 stations FM/AM stations

(A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset

station groups). Preset the desired stations to this unit by

using the automatic or manual station preset.

■Automatic station preset

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 FM stations with strong signals in order.

(U.S.A. model only)

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 AM HD Radio, FM HD Radio, and analog FM radio

stations with strong signals.

(U.S.A. model only)

1Press KBAND (or 7BAND) to select the

desired reception band.

This unit searches the stations in the selected band

and then another band.

2Press and hold KBAND (or 7BAND) for

more than 3 seconds.

The MEMORY indicator flashes and “AUTO

MEMORY” appears in the front panel display. After

approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts

from the current frequency and proceeds toward

higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the

MEMORY indicator disappears.

• To specify the preset group and number from which this unit

stores stations, press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

8CAT./A-E l / h and 8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly

after you perform step 2.

• To cancel the automatic station preset, press KBAND (or

7BAND) again.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is

cleared when you store a new station under the same preset

station number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for

all the available stations.

• (U.S.A. model only)

When this unit stores the FM HD Radio stations with this

feature, this unit stores only the main audio program of the

stations (HD1). When you want to store the sub-audio programs

of the FM HD Radio stations, preset the stations manually.

■Manual station preset

Use this feature to store the FM or AM stations manually.

(U.S.A. model only)

You can store the analog FM/AM radio stations and FM/

AM HD Radio stations manually, and you can also store

the sub-audio programs of FM HD Radio station.

1Tune into a station.

See page 47 for tuning instructions.

(U.S.A. model only)

To store a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station

(HD2 to HD8), press 0PRG SELECT b / a

repeatedly to select the desired audio program (page 50).

2Press HMEMORY (or 9MEMORY).

The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel

and this unit automatically selects an empty preset

number.

• To store the selected station under an empty preset number

automatically, press and hold HMEMORY (or

9MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2.

In this case, the following steps are unnecessary.

• To cancel the manual station preset, press HMEMORY

(or 9MEMORY) again.

3To select the preset group and number (A1 to

E8), press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(or 8CAT./A-E l / h and 8PRESET/CH k /

n) repeatedly.

• To select a higher preset station group and number,

press Gh (or 8k).

• To select a lower preset station group and number,

press Gl (or 8n).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE and then

press 3TUNER.

Preset FM/AM stations

Notes

MEMORY

A1 FM 88.9MHz

AUTO MEMORY

Flashes

PRESET

MEMORY A1

FM 88.9MHz

Lights up

PRESET

MEMORY C2

FM 88.9MHz

Preset station group and number

49 En

FM/AM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION English

• You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing

the numeric buttons (A).

• If you select a preset number being used ("*" appears next

to the preset number), the current preset station will be

overwritten.

4Press FENTER (or 8ENTER).

The preset station is set and the PRESET indicator

disappears.

The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

■Recalling a preset station

1If the PRESET indicator in the front panel

turns off, press ISEARCH MODE (or

HSRCH MODE) to turn it on.

You cannot enter the preset tuning mode if no preset station is

set in advance.

2Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select

the desired preset station group and number

(A1 to E8).

• Empty preset numbers are skipped.

• You can also select a preset station group (A to E) by pressing

8CAT./A-E l / h and number (1 to 8) by pressing the

numeric buttons (A),

• (U.S.A. model only)

When you recall one of the sub-audio program (HD2 to HD8)

of an FM HD Radio station, it takes a few seconds for this unit

to recall the desired program. While this unit recalls the sub-

audio program, this unit outputs the sound of the analog service

of the station.

• (U.S.A. model only)

If the selected sub-audio program is currently not available, this

unit is tuned into the main audio program, and if the main audio

program is also not available, this unit is tuned into the analog

service.

■Clearing preset stations

You can clear the assignments of preset stations.

1Select the preset station you want to clear.

For details, see “Recalling a preset station” (page 49).

2Press and hold ISEARCH MODE (or

HSRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in

the front panel display.

3Press FENTER (or 8ENTER) to clear the

preset station.

To cancel the operation, press ISEARCH MODE (or

HSRCH MODE) again.

Note

PRESET

A FM 88.9MHz

Lights up

PRESET

A5 FM 89.5MHz

Preset station group and number

A1 CLEAR?[ENT]

FM 88.9MHz

50 En

HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally.

Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services.

Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a

single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”.

This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM

stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names,

program types, and comments) from supplemental program services (HD1 to HD8).

• The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, you cannot tune into a hybrid HD Radio

station while this unit is in the monaural tuning mode (page 47).

• This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive

all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital

FM HD Radio station directly by using the numeric buttons (A) (page 47).

Use this feature to select one of the 8 HD Radio audio

programs (HD1 to HD8) when the unit is in the tuner

mode. Each audio program contains data programs.

When the selected FM HD Radio station provides some

audio programs, currently selected audio program number

appears in the front panel display as follows.

Press 0PRG SELECT b / a on the remote

control repeatedly to toggle between HD Radio

audio programs.

You can also select the desired HD Radio audio program by

pressing the numeric key. While this unit is in the automatic or

manual tuning mode, press a numeric button (1-8) (A) and then

MENT.

• Only 1 HD Radio audio program (HD1) is available for AM

broadcasts, while up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to HD8) are

available for FM broadcasts. The audio programs from HD2 to

HD8 can be selected only when they contain data programs.

• When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator

disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is

automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds.

• Some audio programs may not contain data programs

depending on the broadcasting station and the time period.

• For the best reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna so

that “ ” or “ ” is displayed.

Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)

Notes

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE and then

press 3TUNER.

Selecting HD Radio™ audio

programs

FM 88.9MHz1

WXYZ-FM <1/3>

Audio program

Notes

51 En

Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)

BASIC

OPERATION English

Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in

the front panel display or in the OSD.

• You can configure the display settings with “DISPLAY SET”

(page 83).

• To hold or release the displayed information, set the operation

mode selector to ESOURCE and then press 8ENTER. While

it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel.

■Front panel display

Press LINFO (or set the operation mode

selector to EAMP and then press BINFO)

repeatedly to toggle between the following HD

Radio information displays.

Back to “STATION INFO”

■Video monitor (OSD)

Set the operation mode selector to ESOURCE

and then press JDISPLAY on the remote

control to turn on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed in the OSD.

[1] Preset station group and number, frequency,

audio program (only when multiple audio

programs are available)

[2] Program category

[3] Song title

[4] Album title

[5] Antenna reception level

[6] Stereo/mono

[7] Station name, audio program (only when

multiple audio programs are available)

[8]Artist name

Displaying HD Radio™ information

STATION INFO

Station information such as station name, audio

program (only when multiple audio programs are

available) and frequency

CATEGORY INFO

Program category

SONG INFO

Artist name, song title

ALBUM INFO

Album title

ANTENNA INFO

Antenna reception level

DSP PROG. INFO

Sound field program

INPUT INFO

Input source

TUNERANT:

A1FM88.9MHz2STEREO

WXYZ-FMHD<2/3>

:ClassicRock

:FrankieZipper

:RoadtoIndia

:Made-to-order

[1]

[2]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[3]

[4]

52 En

XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and

entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip

hop, XM has something for every music fan.

The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

■Enjoying XM HD Surround content

This unit is equipped with the NRL-THX and NRL-THX Music decoders that play back the XM HD surround sound

content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience (page 66).

Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home

Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of

this unit. For details, see the operating instructions

provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock.

To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,

the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a

southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the

sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “ANTENNA

INFO” information in the front panel or “XM Information”

screen in the video monitor (page 56) to check the antenna

reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna.

If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM TUNER” appears in

the front panel display, the connection and setting of the

antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may

not be correct.

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

XM Satellite Radio online information

For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/

For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/

Note

XM READY legal disclaimer

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM

service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any

technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees

and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent

explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO

(U.S. residents) and 1-877-GETXMSR (Canadian residents). XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

(sold separately)

Note

53 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION English

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,

inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-

Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio

system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to

subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There

are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID:

On the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package,

and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the

following eight squares for reference.

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at

http://activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-

967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada

online at https://activate.xmradio.ca/ or call 1-877-GET-XMSR

(1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will

send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel

lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during

peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home

audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full

lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.

1Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press

3XM) to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio

information (such as channel number, channel name,

category, artist name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel appears in the front panel display.

When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT jacks.

• If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or in the OSD, see “XM Satellite Radio”

(page 109)

2Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” (page 53).

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” (page 54).

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” (page 54).

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access

mode” (page 54).

• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD

surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in

multi-channels (page 66).

• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (page 55).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front

panel display or in the OSD (page 56).

■All Channel Search mode

1Press ISEARCH MODE (or HSRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

Activating XM Satellite Radio

Note

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE.

XM Satellite Radio operations

Notes

DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM SIRIUS

001 Preview

Lights up

54 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

2Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n).

■Category Search mode

1Press ISEARCH MODE (or HSRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2Press KCATEGORY (or 8A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n).

■Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset

channels” (page 55).

1Press ISEARCH MODE (or HSRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2Press KCATEGORY (or 8A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (A).

■Direct number access mode

1Press HSRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

2Press the numeric buttons (A) to enter the

desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons (A) as shown below.

• To display the XM Radio ID number in the front panel display,

select channel “0”.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (A) on the remote control and then press

MENT to confirm the input number.

• Instead of pressing MENT to tune into the channel

immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms

the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (A) or MENT

cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.

1 2 3

55 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION English

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

(page 54).

1Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations”

(page 53).

2Press HMEMORY (or 9MEMORY).

The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel

and this unit automatically selects an empty preset

number.

• To store the selected channel under an empty preset

number automatically, press and hold HMEMORY (or

9MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2.

In this case, the following steps are unnecessary.

• To cancel the preset operation, press HMEMORY (or

9MEMORY) again.

3To select the preset channel group and

number (A1 to E8), press GPRESET/

TUNING/CH l / h (or 8CAT./A-E l / h

and 8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly.

• To select a higher preset channel group and

number, press Gh (or 8k).

• To select a lower preset channel group and number,

press Gl (or 8n).

• You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing

the numeric buttons (A).

• If you select a preset number being used ("*" appears next

to the preset number), the current preset channel will be

overwritten.

4Press FENTER (or 8ENTER).

The preset channel is set and the PRESET indicator

disappears.

■Clearing preset channels

You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite

Radio channels.

1Select the preset XM Satellite Radio channel

to clear.

For details, see “Preset Search mode” (page 54).

2Press and hold ISEARCH MODE (or

HSRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in

the front panel display.

3Press FENTER (or 8ENTER) to clear the

preset channel.

To cancel the operation, press ISEARCH MODE

(or HSRCH MODE).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE and then

press 3XM.

Setting the XM Satellite Radio

preset channels

043 XMU

Channel number

PRESET

MEMORY A1

043 XMU

Lights up

56 En

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display or in the OSD.

• You can configure the display settings with “DISPLAY SET”

(page 83).

• You can hold or release the displayed information by pressing

8ENTER. While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the

front panel.

• If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or video monitor, see “XM Satellite Radio”

(page 109).

• The current XM Satellite Radio reception level appears on the

top of the XM Satellite Radio information screen. For the best

reception, adjust the orientation of the antenna of Home Dock

so that “ ” or “ ” is displayed here. “ ” is displayed if

the antenna cannot receive the signals correctly. In this case,

adjust the orientation of the antenna (page 52).

■Front panel display

Press LINFO (or set the operation mode

selector to EAMP and then press BINFO)

repeatedly to toggle between the following XM

Satellite Radio information display modes.

Back to “CATEGORY INFO”

• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

• When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cannot

receive the signals, “NO SIGNAL” appears in the front panel

display.

■Video monitor (OSD)

Press JDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed in the OSD.

[1] Search mode (page 53)

[2] Channel category

[3] Song title

[4] Antenna reception level

[5] Channel number, channel name

[6] Artist name

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE and then

press 3XM.

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

Notes

CATEGORY INFO

Channel category, channel number, channel name

SONG INFO

Artist name, song title, channel number, channel name

ANTENNA INFO

Antenna reception level, channel number, channel name

DSP PROG. INFO

Sound field program

INPUT INFO

Input source, channel number, channel name

XMANT:

ALLCHSEARCH

043:XMU

:Rock

:Coldplay

:Speedofsound

[1]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[3]

57 En

BASIC

OPERATION English

SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free music. Only

SIRIUS has more than 65 original music channels, from today’s hits to R&B, oldies, and classical masterpieces. From

authentic country and real bluegrass to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best of all, it’s all 100%

commercial-free.

SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your

subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to 40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week. (Games

are broadcast during their respective seasons.)

Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS sports offering is unrivaled. And don't forget a host of other

great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For more

information, visit http://www.sirius.com/.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the

SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see

the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect

tuner.

• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed

at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The

orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs

depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals

supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the

antenna.You can mount it indoors or outdoors.

• Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or

“SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor (page 62) to

check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of

the antenna.

• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall

outlet.

• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears in

the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect

tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the

connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna.

• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel display, this

unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

SIRIUS Satellite Radio legal disclaimer

SIRIUS is available in the U.S.A. for subscribers with addresses in the continental U.S.A. and is available in Canada for subscribers

with a Canadian address. To Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold

separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and information.

“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

Connecting the SiriusConnect™

tuner

SIRIUS

DC 5V

ANT

SiriusConnect™ tuner and the antenna

(sold separately)

To the AC wall outlet

Notes

58 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need

to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To

activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is

uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is

12-digit number and it appears on the package of the

SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect

tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel “0” (see below).

■Displaying the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect tuner

1Set the operation mode selector on the

remote control to ESOURCE and then press

3SIRIUS.

2Press A0 and then MENT to display the

Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.

“000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx”

indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect

tuner) appears in the front panel display.

Write the Sirius ID below.

3Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate

your subscription.

Status messages appear in the front panel display or OSD

during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”

(page 110). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED”

appears.

1Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press

3SIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input

source.

The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights

up in the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio information (such as channel number, channel

name, category, artist name, or song title) for the

currently selected channel appears in the front panel

display.

When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

• The SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT jacks.

• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you

can only select “184” or “000”.

• If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or in the OSD, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”

(page 110).

2Search for a channel by using one of the

SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” (page 59).

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” (page 59).

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” (page 59).

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct number access

mode” (page 59).

• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL

888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE” appears in the front panel

display.

• You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels

(page 60).

• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the

front panel display or in the video monitor (page 62).

Activating SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ subscription

SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information

Contact for activation

URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

ID:

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

operations

Notes

DOCK V-AUX VCR DVR CBL/SAT DVD BD/HD DVD MD/CD-R TV CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM SIRIUS

184 SIRIUS Wea

Lights up

59 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

BASIC

OPERATION English

■All Channel Search mode

1Press ISEARCH MODE (or HSRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH

(or

PRESET/CH

• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by

pressing KCATEGORY (or 8A-E/CAT. l / h).

■Category Search mode

1Press ISEARCH MODE (or HSRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2Press KCATEGORY (or 8A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n).

This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel

Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it

is not malfunction of this unit):

– the channel is locked (page 61).

– the channel is out of service.

– you do not subscribe to the channel.

■Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see

“Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels”

(page 60).

1Press ISEARCH MODE (or HSRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2Press KCATEGORY (or 8A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3Press GPRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) (A).

■Direct number access mode

1Press HSRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

2Press the numeric buttons (A) to enter the

desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons (A) as shown below.

• To display the Sirius ID number displayed in the front panel

display, select channel “0”.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (A) on the remote control and then press

MENT to confirm the input number.

• Instead of pressing MENT to tune into the channel

immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms

the entered channel number.

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a

one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms

the entered channel number.

• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears in the front

panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number

by using the numeric buttons (A) or press MENT to cancel

(page 61).

Note

1 2 3

60 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

(page 54).

1Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio search modes.

For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

operations” (page 58).

2Press HMEMORY (or 9MEMORY).

The PRESET indicator lights up in the front panel

and this unit automatically selects an empty preset

number.

• To store the selected channel under an empty preset

number automatically, press and hold HMEMORY (or

9MEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2.

In this case, the following steps are unnecessary.

• To cancel the preset operation, press HMEMORY (or

9MEMORY) again.

3To select the preset channel group and

number (A1 to E8), press GPRESET/

TUNING/CH l / h (or 8CAT./A-E l / h

and 8PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly.

• To select a higher preset channel group and

number, press Gh (or 8k).

• To select a lower preset channel group and number,

press Gl (or 8n).

• You can also select a preset number (1 to 8) by pressing

the numeric buttons (A).

• If you select a preset number being used ("*" appears next

to the preset number), the current preset channel will be

overwritten.

4Press FENTER (or 8ENTER).

The preset channel is set and the PRESET indicator

disappears.

■Clearing preset channels

You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels.

1Select the preset SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel to clear.

For details, see “Preset Search mode” (page 59).

2Press and hold ISEARCH MODE (or

HSRCH MODE) until “CLEAR?” appears in

the front panel display.

3Press FENTER (or 8ENTER) to clear the

preset channel.

To cancel the operation, press ISEARCH MODE

(or HSRCH MODE).

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE and then

press 3SIRIUS.

Setting the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ preset channels

001 SIRIUS Hit

Channel number

PRESET

MEMORY A1

001 SIRIUS HIT

Lights up

61 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

BASIC

OPERATION English

You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access

to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit

automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is

in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode

and you search a channel by pressing GPRESET/

TUNING/CH l / h (or 8PRESET/CH k / n).

■Setting the code number and the locking

channels

Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number

(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.

1Press 7BAND.

The "PARENTAL LOCK" screen appears.

If a SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to this unit,

“Check Sirius Tuner” appears.

If the Parental Lock code number is already set,

“PIN:___” appears instead of “NEW PIN:0000”. Refer to

step 4 and then proceed the operations.

2Enter the desired 4-digit code number by

using the numeric buttons (A).

3Press 8ENTER to confirm the code number.

“OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel

list appears. Refer to the step 5 and then proceed the

operations.

4Enter the 4-digit code number you set in step

2 above to unlock the protection.

When the code number is correct, “OK” and then the

SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list appears.

5Press 8l / h repeatedly to select the

desired channel category and then press

8k / n repeatedly to select the channel you

want to lock.

In the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen, this unit

outputs the sound of the selected channel even if the

channel is locked.

6Press 8ENTER to lock the selected

channel.

Check mark appears before the locked channel.

When you select the locked channel and press 8ENTER,

this unit unlocks the selected channel.

7Repeat steps 5 and 6 to lock the channels

you want.

8Press 7BAND to exit from the “PARENTAL

LOCK” screen.

This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in

the “PARENTAL LOCK” screen. If the channel is

locked, this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather

& Emergency” or “000 Sirius ID”.

• If you forget or want to change the Parental lock code number,

use “SIRIUS PIN” (page 103) to reset the Parental Lock code

number.

• Selecting “ALL” in “INITIALIZE” (page 103) will cancel all

parental locks.

■Tuning into the locked channels

You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct

number access mode or preset tuning mode. When you

tune into the locked channel, following message appears

in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set

for the Parental Lock feature by using the numeric buttons

(A) or press MENT to cancel the tuning.

• If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong” appears in the

front panel display and this unit is tuned into the previously

selected channel.

• If a channel is unlocked, you can also select the channel in Zone

2 and Zone 3.

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE and then

press 3SIRIUS.

Setting the Parental Lock

Note

PARENTAL LOCK

NEWPIN:0000

[p]/[[]:Cursor

[0] [9]:Number

[ENT]:Enter

Note

Notes

018 LOCKED

PIN:____

Channel number

62 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display or in the OSD.

• You can configure the display settings with “DISPLAY SET”

(page 83).

• You can hold or release the displayed information by pressing

8ENTER. While it is held, the HOLD indicator flashes in the

front panel.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front

panel display or video monitor, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”

(page 110).

■Front panel display

Press LINFO (or set the operation mode

selector to EAMP and then press BINFO)

repeatedly to toggle between the following

SIRIUS Satellite Radio information display

modes.

Back to “CATEGORY INFO”

• If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character

that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

• When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the

signals, “ACQUIRING” appears in the front panel display.

• When an information is unavailable, “–– ––” appears.

■Video monitor (OSD)

Press JDISPLAY on the remote control to turn

on or off the information display.

The following information is displayed in the OSD.

[1] Search mode (page 58)

[2] Channel category

[3] Song title

[4] Composer name

[5] Antenna reception level

[6] Channel number/name

[7] Artist name

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE and then

press 3SIRIUS.

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ information

Note

CATEGORY INFO

Channel category, channel number, channel name

SONG INFO

Artist name, song title, channel number, channel name

COMPOSER INFO

Composer name, channel number, channel name

ANTENNA INFO

Antenna reception level, channel number, channel name

DSP PROG. INFO

Sound field program

INPUT INFO

Input source, channel number, channel name

SIRIUSANT:

ALLCHSEARCH

008:Big'80s

:Pop

:Sanumemo

:RoadtoIndia

C:FrankieZipper

[1]

[2]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[3]

[4]

63 En

BASIC

OPERATION English

Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit (page 23), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can

also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression artifacts

(such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 44).

• This unit supports iPod touch, iPod (Click Wheel, including iPod classic), iPod nano and iPod mini.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model of your Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following description is

based on using YDS-11.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display.

• For details about status messages displayed in the front panel display and in the OSD, see “iPod” (page 112).

• You can select whether or not this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is in the standby mode by configuring

the “STANDBY CHARGE” setting (page 82).

You can control your iPod when “DOCK” is selected as

the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done

with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)

or without it (simple remote mode).

■Remote control operation

■Controlling iPod in the simple remote

mode

You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,

stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without

the aid of the OSD of this unit.

Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.

■Controlling iPod in the menu browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod

using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD

of this unit.

You can also browse the songs and videos stored on your

iPod in the OSD.

Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to

suit your personal preferences.

You can configure the display settings with “DISPLAY SET”

(page 83).

• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front

panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are

replaced with underscores “_”.

1Press JDISPLAY on the remote control.

The following display appears in the OSD.

Using iPod™

Notes

Before performing the following operations, set the operation

mode selector on the remote control to ESOURCE and then

press 3DOCK.

Controlling iPod™

Button Function

8ENTER Subsequent menu

kMenu up

nMenu down

lPrevious menu

hSubsequent menu

0ll Search backward (Press and hold)

hh Search forward (Press and hold)

aSkip forward

bSkip backward

sStop

ePause (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

pPlay (Menu browse mode)

Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

JDISPLAY Display

Notes

iPod Top

Music >

Videos >

Settings >

64 En

Using iPod™

2Press 8k / n to select “Music”, “ Videos” or

“Settings” and then press 8h.

• To browse the music contents stored on your iPod,

select “Music”.

• To browse the video contents stored on your iPod,

select “Videos”.

• To change the playback settings of your iPod,

select “Settings”.

“Videos” does not appear unless both your iPod and Yamaha

iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature.

3Press 8k / n / l / h on the remote control

to navigate the iPod menu and then press

8ENTER to begin playback of the selected

item.

Items under “Music”

Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums

(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers

(composers)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

Items under “Videos”

Up to video contents stored on your iPod

Items under “Settings”

Shuffle, Repeat

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random

order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in

random order.

Repeat Repeat

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

• To toggle between the setting parameters, press 8ENTER

repeatedly.

• While the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears in the OSD.

• While the repeat function is set to “One” or “All”, “ ” or

“ ” appears in the OSD.

■Function of the play information display

[1] Track number/total tracks

[2] Name of the artist

[3] Name of the album

[4] Name of the song

[5] Progress bar

[6] Elapsed time

[7] Shuffle and repeat icons

[8] (playback), (pausing), (search

forward) or (search backward)

[9] Remaining time

Note

All

iPod[Play]

1/9



FrankieZipper

Made-to-order

RoadtoIndia



|||||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;

0:51-7:44

All

[1]

[2]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

65 En

BASIC

OPERATION English

You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and

enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between

this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

and your Bluetooth component in advance.

Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth

component with the Bluetooth receiver connected to this

unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been

deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a

Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications.

• You need the pairing operation only for the first time when you

use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth receiver.

• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other

component with which Bluetooth communications are to be

established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s

operating instructions.

There are two pairing methods: pairing by using “START

PAIRING” in “SET MENU” and quick pairing.

■Pairing by using “SET MENU”

Use this feature to perform pairing with the OSD. For

details, see “START PAIRING” (page 82).

■Quick pairing

1Rotate the CINPUT selector (or set the

operation mode selector to ESOURCE and

then press 3DOCK) to select “DOCK” as the

input source.

2Turn on your Bluetooth component and then

set the Bluetooth component to the pairing

mode.

For details about how to operate the Bluetooth

component, refer to the manual for it.

3Press and hold FENTER (or 8ENTER)

until “Searching” appears in the front panel

display.

While the Bluetooth receiver is in the pairing mode,

DOCK indicator flashes in the front panel display.

To cancel the pairing, press FENTER (or 8ENTER)

again.

4Check that the Bluetooth component detects

the Bluetooth receiver.

If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth

receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA” (example) appears in

the Bluetooth device list.

5Select the Bluetooth receiver in the

Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass

key “0000” on the Bluetooth component.

When the pairing procedure is successful,

“Completed” appears in the front panel display.

The Yamaha Bluetooth receiver can be paired with up to eight

Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully

with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the

pairing data for the least recently used other component is

cleared.

1Rotate the CINPUT selector (or set the

operation mode selector to ESOURCE and

then press 3DOCK) to select “DOCK” as the

input source.

2Start playback of your Bluetooth component.

When the connected Bluetooth receiver detects the

Bluetooth component, “BT connected” appears in the

front panel display.

• When you press 8ENTER on the remote control, the

connected Bluetooth receiver searches and connect to the last

connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth receiver

cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in

the front panel display.

• To disconnect the Bluetooth receiver from the Bluetooth

component, press 8ENTER.

Using Bluetooth™ components

Pairing the Bluetooth™ receiver

and your Bluetooth component

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the

pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully

understand all the instructions before starting.

Note

Playback of the Bluetooth™

component

66 En

■Selecting decoders for 2-channel

sources (surround decode mode)

Use this feature to play back sources with selected

decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-

channels.

Set the operation mode selector to EAMP and

then press QSUR. DECODE repeatedly on the

remote control to select the surround decode

mode.

You can select desired surround decoder modes depending

on the type of source you are playing and your personal

preference.

You can change the decoder parameter settings in the OSD. For

details on how to change the parameters, See “Changing sound

field parameter settings” on page 67.

■Decoder descriptions

When you select the surround decode mode for the multi-

channel digital sources, this unit automatically selects the

corresponding decoder for each source.

■Selecting decoders used with MOVIE

sound field programs

You can select one of the following decoder types for use

with the MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono

Movie”). For details about the MOVIE sound field

programs, see “For movie sources” (page 43). For details

on how to select the decoder type, See “Changing sound

field parameter settings” (page 67).

Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema

Advanced sound configurations

Selecting decoders

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

PLIIx Movie

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie

sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B

L/R SP” (page 76) is set to “

NONE

” or using headphones.

PLIIx Music

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music

sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B

L/R SP” (page 76) is set to “

NONE

” or using headphones.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources.

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when "SUR.B L/R SP"

(

page 76

) is set to “NONE” or using headphones.

Decoder description

Name of the

decoder

(Decoder Type)

PLIIx Music

PLII Music

PLIIx Game

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game

sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B

L/R SP” (page 76) is set to “

NONE

” or using headphones.

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources.

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music sources.

CSII Cinema

(U.S.A. model only)

SRS Circle Surround II processing for movie sources.

CSII Music

(U.S.A. model only)

SRS Circle Surround II processing for music sources.

NRL-THX

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Neural-THX Surround processing for any sources. The

Neural-THX Surround decoder is especially suitable for the

XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio.

NRL-THX Music

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Neural-THX Surround processing for music sources. The

Neural-THX Surround decoder is especially suitable for the

XM HD Surround music program of XM Satellite Radio.

67 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

■Selecting decoders for multi-channel

sources

If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature

to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel

sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX,

DTS-ES, or Neural-THX decoders.

Set the operation mode selector to EAMP and

then press LEXTD SUR. on the remote control

repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-

channel playback.

Use this feature to activate the desired decoder manually when

this unit cannot detect the signal flag encoded to the input

sources correctly.

• The available decoders vary depending on the setting of the

speakers and the input sources.

• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible in the following cases:

– when “SUR. L/R SP” (page 75) or “SUR.B L/R SP” (page 76)

is set to “NONE”.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is being played.

– when the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– when this unit is in the stereo playback, 7ch Enhancer

(page 44) or Pure Direct (page 46) mode.

– when “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (page 103).

• You can set the initial extended decoder mode with "EXTD

SUR." (page 85).

• “Neural-THX” is only available on the U.S.A. and Canada

models.

You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory

settings. Although you do not have to change the initial

factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

You cannot change the sound field parameter values when

“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”

(page 84).

1Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2Set the operation mode selector to EAMP

and then press JPARAMETER on the

remote control.

The following screen appears in the OSD.

3Press 8l / h repeatedly to select the

desired sound field program you want to

adjust.

4Press 8k / n to select the desired sound

field parameter and then 8l / h to change

the selected sound field parameter value.

For details about each sound field parameter, see

page 39.

• To increase the value, press 8h.

• To decrease the value, press 8l.

Choice Functions

AUTO Activates the optimum decoder to play back

signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit

recognizes a signal flag being input.

Decoders

(PLIIx Movie,

PLIIx Music,

EX/ES,

Neural-THX)

Use this feature to activate the desired decoders

for the playback of multi-channel sources

manually.

OFF Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1

channels.

Notes

Changing sound field parameter

settings

Note

Sound field program category

Sound field parameters Sound field parameter

values

[p]/[[]:

MOVIE 1/2

Sci-Fi

SUR.;;PLIIx Movie

DSP LEVEL;;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;;16ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;;16ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0

Select

Cursor

68 En

Advanced sound configurations

• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field

program parameter settings.

• The available parameters for some of the sound field programs

may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this

case, press 8 k / n to scroll through pages.

• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the

initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the

parameter name in the OSD.

• If you press and hold 8 l / h to change the value, the value

shown in the front panel display will momentarily stop at the

initial factory setting.

• To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program,

press 8 k / n repeatedly to select “INITIALIZE” and then

press 8 h. In the confirmation screen, press 8 h to confirm

or 8 l to cancel the initialization.

5Press JPARAMETER to turn off the sound

field parameter display.

■Basic configuration of sound field

programs

Each sound field program has some parameters defining

the characteristics of the program. To customize the

selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/

or “DIALOG LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.

To change sound field parameter settings, see page 67 for

details.

Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound

field programs (DSP LEVEL)

Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect

sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field

in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to

adjust the level of the effect sounds.

Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows:

Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when

• the effect sound of the selected sound field

program is too weak.

• you cannot recognize any difference between the

sound field programs.

Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when

• the sound is vague.

• you feel that the additional sound effect is

excessive.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

Adjusting the vertical dialogue position

(DIALOG LIFT)

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the

dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is

at the center of the video monitor screen.

If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video

monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALOG LIFT”.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the

highest position.

• “DIALOG LIFT” is available only when “PRESENCE SP” is

set to “YES” (page 76).

• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial

dialogue position.

[[]:

MOVIE 2/2

Sci-Fi

SB INIT.DLY;;15ms

SB ROOM SIZE ;;1.0

DIALOG LIFT;;;;;0

INITIALIZE

Initialize

The DSP effect

sound level is low

The DSP effect sound

level is high

Notes

The ideal

dialogue

position

Move up to the ideal dialogue position

69 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

■Sound field parameter descriptions

Use the following sound field parameters to customize the sound field programs in detail.

To change sound field parameter settings, see page 67 for details.

Sound field parameter Features

INIT.DLY

P.INIT.DLY

S.INIT.DLY

SB INIT.DLY

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the

apparent size of the sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first

reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the

listener.

When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the

corresponding room size parameters likewise.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)

1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INIT.DLY)

ROOM SIZE

P.ROOM SIZE

S.ROOM SIZE

SB ROOM SIZE

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the

sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is

repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original

reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected

sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one

to two doubles the apparent length of the room.

When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the

corresponding initial delay parameters likewise.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time Time Time

Delay Delay Delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0

Sound source

70 En

Advanced sound configurations

LIVENESS

S.LIVENESS

SB LIVENESS

Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the

hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound

source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which

has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as

“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets

you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.

Control range: 0 to 10

REV.TIME Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation

sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment

over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for "dead" sources and listening

room environments, and a shorter time for "live" sources and listening room environments.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

Sound field parameter Features

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

Reverberation Reverberation

Source sound

REV.TIME REV.TIME REV.TIME

Sound source Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

71 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

REV.DELAY Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and

the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound

begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

REV.LEVEL Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the

stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

DIRECT

(“2ch Stereo” only)

2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo

sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when

“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (page 46).

• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when

“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.

• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front

left and right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the

following cases:

– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (page 75).

– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (page 75) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (page 75).

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

PL LEVEL

PR LEVEL

(“7ch Stereo” only)

7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right

levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

(dB)

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

Time

60 dB

Source sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

72 En

Advanced sound configurations

EFFECT LEVEL

(“Straight Enhancer” and

“7ch Enhancer” only)

Straight and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of some

sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.

Choices: HIGH, LOW

• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.

• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.

SUR

(MOVIE sound field

programs (except “Mono

Movie”) and “SUR.

DECODE” only)

Decoder type. Select the decoder used with the selected sound field program. The decoder parameters

for “SUR. DECODE” vary depending on the selected decoder type. See page 66 for details.

Sound field parameter Features

73 En

Advanced sound configurations

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

■Decoder parameter descriptions

Use the following decoder parameters to customize the specific decoders in detail.

Decoder parameter Features

PANORAMA

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as

well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

CENTER WIDTH

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely

towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center

channel output towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to

7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)

Initial setting: 3

DIMENSION

(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII

Music” only)

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front

or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)

Initial setting: STD (standard)

C.IMAGE

(“Neo:6 Music” only)

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center

channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.

Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to

1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)

Initial setting: 0.3

FOCUS

(“CSII Cinema” and “CSII

Music” only)

SRS Circle Surround II Cinema and SRS Circle Surround II Music focus. Adjusts the clearness of a

sound image by elevating the perception of the sound image to compensate for non-optimally placed

speakers from a lower location. A larger value makes speakers sound as if they are positioned at ear

level.

Control range: 0 (lower location) to 8 (higher location)

TruBass

(“CSII Cinema” and “CSII

Music” only)

SRS Circle Surround II Cinema and SRS Circle Surround II Music TruBass. Adjusts the lower register

by producing the perception of improved low frequency performance. A larger value improves bass

even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer.

Control range: 0 (standard low-frequency performance) to 8 (enhanced low-frequency performance)

74 En

The “MANUAL SETUP” menu allows you to manually adjust speaker and system parameters using the remote control.

For the complete menu structure, see “SET MENU tree” (page 123).

The initial factory settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.

This section explains how to configure parameters in the

MANUAL SETUP menu using the OSD.

• To return to the previous menu level, press 9RETURN.

• Pressing JPARAMETER cancels the menu operation.

1Set the operation mode selector to EAMP

and then press HMENU to enter “SET

MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” screen appears in the OSD.

2Press 8k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”

and then press 8ENTER.

The “MANUAL SETUP” screen appears in the OSD.

3Press 8k / n repeatedly and then press

8ENTER to select and enter the desired

menu.

As an example, the following screen appears if

“SOUND MENU” is selected.

4Press 8k / n repeatedly and then press

8ENTER to select and enter the desired

submenu.

As an example, the following screen appears if “LFE

LEVEL” is selected.

5Press 8k / n to select the desired parameter

and then 8l / h to change the parameter

settings.

• To increase the value, press 8h.

• To decrease the value, press 8l.

6Press HMENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Operating the MANUAL SETUP

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;SYSTEM MEMORY

;SIGNAL INFO

Up/Down

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

MANUAL SETUP

1 SPEAKER MENU

2 VOLUME MENU

3 SOUND MENU

4 VIDEO MENU

5 INPUT MENU

6 OPTION MENU

Up/Down

Enter

[]/[]:

[ENTER]:

[

3 SOUND MENU

A)EQUALIZER

B)LFE LEVEL

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

D)LIPSYNC

E)AUDIO SET

F)PURE DIRECT

Up/Down

Enter

[]/[]:

[p]/[[]:

[

B)LFE LEVEL

SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;-20dB

Up/Down

Adjust

75 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker

settings. Most of the “SPEAKER MENU” parameters are

set automatically when you run the automatic setup.

• Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” (page 77) to output the test tone for

the “CONFIG”, “LEVEL” and “DISTANCE” settings.

• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the

crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or

slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

■Speaker configurations A)CONFIG

LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

LFE signals output

Low-frequency signals output

*1 Output(s) the low-frequency signals of the front

channels and other speakers set to “SMALL”.

*2 Always output the low-frequency signals of the front

channels.

*3 Output the low-frequency signals if the speakers are set

to “LARGE”.

*4 Outputs the low-frequency signals of the speakers set to

“SMALL”.

Front speakers FRONT SP

When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, you can select

only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is

set to other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit change the

value to “LARGE” automatically.

Center speaker CENTER SP

Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP

1 SPEAKER MENU

Choice

Subwoofer(s) and speakers

Subwoofer(s) Front

speakers

Other

speakers

BOTH Output No output No output

SWFR Output No output No output

FRONT No output Output No output

Choice

Subwoofer(s) and speakers

Subwoofer(s) Front

speakers

Other

speakers

BOTH *1 *2 *3

SWFR *4 *3 *3

FRONT No output *1 *3

Measure for the speaker size

The woofer section of a speaker is

– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large

– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small

Choice Descriptions

LARGE Select this setting when the front speakers are

large.

SMALL Select this setting when the front speakers are

small.

Note

Choice Descriptions

LARGE Select this setting when the center speaker is

large.

SMALL Select this setting when the center speaker is

small.

NONE Select this setting when you do not use the center

speaker. The center channel signals are directed

to the front left and right speakers.

Choice Descriptions

LARGE Select this setting when the surround speakers

are large.

SMALL Select this setting when the surround speakers

are small.

NONE Select this setting when you do not use the

surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode (page 44), and “SUR.B L/

R SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.

76 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Surround back left/right speakers

SUR.B L/R SP

Presence speakers PRESENCE SP

Bass cross over CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “SMALL” (or “SML”) in “CONFIG”

(page 75). All frequencies below the selected frequency

will be sent to the subwoofer or front speakers depending

on the setting of “LFE/BASS OUT” (page 75).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the

crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or

slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

■Speaker level B)LEVEL

Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in “CONFIG” (page 75).

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting:

FR.L/FR.R/SWFR/PR.L/PR.R: 0 dB

CENT./SUR.L/SUR.R/SB L/SB R: –1.0 dB

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the

“CONFIG” setting.

• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/

R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1”.

■Speaker distance C)DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same

time.

Unit for the speaker distance adjustment UNIT

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)

[Other models]: meters (m)

Choice Descriptions

LRGx1 Select this setting when the single surround back

speaker is large.

LRGx2 Select this setting when the surround back left

and right speakers are large.

SMLx1 Select this setting when the single surround back

speaker is small.

SMLx2 Select this setting when the surround back left

and right speakers are small.

NONE Select this setting when you do not use the

surround back speakers. The surround back

channel signals are directed to the surround left

and right speakers.

Choice Descriptions

YES Select this setting when you use the presence

speakers.

NONE Select this setting when you do not use the

presence speakers.

Choice Functions

NORMAL Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.

REVERSE Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse.

LEVEL Adjusted speaker

FR.L Front left speaker

FR.R Front right speaker

CENT. Center speaker

SUR.L Surround left speaker

SUR.R Surround right speaker

SB L Surround back left speaker

SB R Surround back right speaker

SWFR Subwoofer

PR.L Presence left speaker

PR.R Presence right speaker

Notes

Choice Functions

meters (m) Adjusts speaker distances in meters.

feet (ft) Adjusts speaker distances in feet.

77 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)

Initial setting:

FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/PRNS R: 3.00 m

(10.0 ft)

CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)

SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the

“CONFIG” setting.

• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if

“SUR.B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1”.

■Test tone D)TEST TONE

Turns the test tone output on or off for the “CONFIG”,

“LEVEL” and “DISTANCE” settings.

If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s

length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening

position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,

calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.

This function is automatically turned off if you exit from

“SPEAKER MENU”.

Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume

settings.

Adaptive dynamic range control

ADAPTIVE DRC

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in

conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful

when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When

“ADAPTIVE DRC” is set to “AUTO”, this unit controls

the dynamic range as follows:

– If the VOLUME setting is low:

the dynamic range is narrow

– If the VOLUME setting is high:

the dynamic range is wide

• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal

sources by using “DYNAMIC RANGE” in “SOUND MENU”

(page 79).

• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.

The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function

when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode (page 46).

Adaptive DSP level ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL

Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP

effect level (page 68) automatically in conjunction with

the volume level.

Even if you set “ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL” to “AUTO”, this

unit does not change but the fine-tunes the specified value of

“DSP LEVEL” (page 68).

DISTANCE Adjusted speaker

FRONT L Front left speaker

FRONT R Front right speaker

CENTER Center speaker

SUR. L Surround left speaker

SUR. R Surround right speaker

SB L Surround back left speaker

SB R Surround back right speaker

SWFR Subwoofer

PRNS L Presence left speaker

PRNS R Presence right speaker

Notes

Choice Functions

OFF This unit does not output the test tone for the

“CONFIG”, “LEVEL” and “DISTANCE”

settings.

ON This unit outputs the test tone for the

“CONFIG”, “LEVEL” and “DISTANCE”

settings.

Note

2 VOLUME MENU

Choice Functions

AUTO Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.

OFF Does not adjust the dynamic range automatically.

Note

Choice Functions

AUTO Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with

the volume level.

OFF Does not adjust the DSP effect level

automatically.

Note

Input level

Output level

Input level

AUTO

OFF

AUTO

OFF

VOLUME: low VOLUME: high

78 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Muting type MUTING TYPE

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (page 37).

Maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected

loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume

range is –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “MAX

VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes

–80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.

Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

• When this unit is in the automatic setup procedure, the volume

level is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current

“MAX VOL.” setting.

• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT. VOL.”

setting.

Initial volume INIT. VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone

when the power of this unit is turned on.

Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT. VOL.”

setting.

Use this feature to adjust the audio parameters.

■Equalizer A)EQUALIZER

Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the

graphic equalizer.

Equalizer type select EQ TYPE

Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.

“AUTO PEQ” is available only after you have done the

automatic setup procedure (page 30).

Graphic equalizer edit GEQ EDIT

Use this feature to adjust the tonal quality of each channel.

Speaker channel: FRONT L, FRONT R, CENTER,

SUR. L, SUR. R, SB L, SB R, PRNS L,

PRNS R, SWFR

Frequency band: 63 Hz, 160 Hz, 400 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,

6.3 kHz, 16 kHz

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

To output a test tone while adjusting the tonal quality, set

“TEST” to “ON”.

• “GEQ EDIT” is available only when “EQ TYPE” is set to

“GEQ”.

• The available speaker channels differ depending on the

“CONFIG” setting.

• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR.B L/

R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1”.

Choice Functions

FULL Mutes all the audio output.

–20dB Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.

Notes

Note

3 SOUND MENU

Choice Functions

AUTO PEQ Uses the parametric equalizer adjusted in the

automatic setup procedure.

GEQ Uses the equalizer settings adjusted in "GEQ

EDIT".

OFF Deactivates the equalizing feature.

Note

Notes

79 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

Parametric equalizer select PEQ SELECT

Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer type that

applied to the results of the automatic setup.

“PEQ SELECT” is available only when “EQ TYPE” is set to

“AUTO PEQ”.

■Low-frequency effect level

B)LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective when the input

signal contains the LFE channel.

Control range: –20 to 0 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Speakers SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level.

Headphones HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the “LFE/BASS OUT” setting (page 75), some

signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack.

■Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is

decoding bitstream signals.

Speakers SPEAKER

Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.

Headphones HEADPHONE

Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the

headphones.

■Audio and video synchronization

(lip sync) D)LIPSYNC

HDMI automatic lip sync mode HDMI AUTO

If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit and compatible with the automatic

audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip

sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video

synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate

or deactivate the automatic lip sync.

Auto delay AUTO DELAY

Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and

video synchronization when you set “HDMI AUTO” to

“ON”.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

“offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio

delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio

delay that you set in “AUTO”. This unit stores the value of

“offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync

compatible video monitors.

Manual delay MANUAL DELAY

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output

manually to synchronize audio with video images when

you set “HDMI AUTO” to “OFF”.

Control range: 0 to 240 ms

Control step: 1 ms

Choice Functions

NATURAL Averages out the frequency response of each all

speakers with higher frequencies being less

emphasized. Recommended if the “FLAT”

setting sounds a little harsh.

FLAT Averages frequency response of all speakers.

Recommended if all of your speakers are of

similar quality.

FRONT Adjusts the frequency response of each speaker

in accordance with the sound of your front

speakers. Recommended if your front speakers

are of much higher quality than your other

speakers.

Note

Choice Functions

MIN/AUTO • MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow

when this unit is decoding bitstream signals

(except Dolby TrueHD).

• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according

to the instruction of the input source signals

when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD

signals.

STD Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When

this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the

dynamic range control is always active

regardless of the instruction of the input source

signals.

MAX Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.

Choice Functions

OFF Select this setting if the video monitor is not

compatible with the automatic lip sync or you do

not want to use the automatic lip sync. Use

“MANUAL DELAY” to adjustment the audio

and video synchronization.

ON Select this setting if the connected video monitor

is compatible with the automatic lip sync. Use

“AUTO DELAY” to make fine adjustments of

the audio and video synchronization.

80 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

■Audio settings E)AUDIO SET

Tone bypass TONE BYPASS

Use this feature to select whether the audio output

bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and

“BASS” are set to 0 dB (page 46).

HDMI audio HDMI AUDIO

Use this feature to select the types of the audio signals

output at the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this

unit.

Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the

connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manuals of

your video monitor and audio source component.

■Pure direct F)PURE DIRECT

Use this feature to select whether this unit outputs the

video signals when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode.

You cannot use the OSD menu even if “PURE DIRECT” is set

to “AUDIO+VIDEO”.

Use this feature to adjust the video parameters.

You can reset the all parameters in “VIDEO MENU” to the

initial factory settings by using “VIDEO” of “INITIALIZE” in

“ADVANCED SETUP” (page 103).

Video conversion VIDEO CONV.

Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals

input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks.

• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line

video signals interchangeably.

• 480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution video signals cannot

be output at the S VIDEO and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the

same type of video connections between each component.

• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are

converted into component video signals, the picture quality may

suffer depending on your VCR.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video

jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such

cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.

Component interlace/progressive up-conversion

COMPONENT I/P

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog

interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video

signals input at the composite video, S-video and

component video jacks so that the analog video signals

deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p

are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.

Choice Functions

AUTO Automatically bypasses the tone control

circuitry to provide the purest signal possible

when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB.

OFF Does not bypass the tone control circuitry.

Choice Functions

AMP Outputs audio signals that can be decoded by

this unit.

AMP+TV Outputs audio signals that can be decoded by

your video monitor connected to the HDMI

OUT jack of this unit.

Note

Choice Functions

AUDIO Does not Output video signals.

AUDIO+VID

Outputs video signals. For the better sound

quality, this unit only activates the limited video

features.

Note

4 VIDEO MENU

Choice Functions

ON Converts composite, S-video, and component

video signals interchangeably and up-converts

composite, S-video, and component video

signals to HDMI video signals.

OFF Does not convert any signals.

Notes

Choice Functions

ON Activates the analog interlace/progressive up-

conversion of the analog video signals.

OFF Deactivates the analog interlace/progressive up-

conversion of the analog video signals.

81 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

• The “COMPONENT I/P” parameter appears only when you set

“VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.

• If your video monitor does not support analog video signals

with 480p/576p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be

displayed on your video monitor when “COMPONENT I/P” is

set to “ON”.

HDMI resolution HDMI RES.

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI up-

scaling of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S

VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the up-

scaled video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack.

This unit up-scales the video signals as follows:

• 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p,

or 1080p

• 480p/576p → 1080i, 720p, or 1080p

• “HDMI RES.” is available only when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to

“ON”.

• This unit automatically detects the video signal resolutions

supported by the connected video monitor and uses an asterisk

(*) to indicate them. If this unit cannot detect the resolutions,

set “MONITOR CHECK” to “SKIP” (page 103).

HDMI aspect ratio HDMI ASPECT

Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for

analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack.

• “HDMI ASPECT” is available only when “HDMI RES.” is not

set to “THROUGH”.

• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this

unit automatically ignores the setting of “HDMI ASPECT”.

• When “HDMI ASPECT” is set to “SMART”, the video images

of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.

Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input

source.

Notes

Choice Functions

THROUGH Does not up-scale any analog video signals.

480p (or 576p),

1080i, 720p,

1080p

Up-scales analog video signals to 480p or 576p,

1080i, 720p, or 1080p of resolution.

Notes

Choice Functions

THRGH Does not make any adjustments to the aspect

ratio for the HDMI video signal sources.

16:9 Displays video images with the aspect ratio of

4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio

of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and left

sides as a result.

SMART Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to

your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9.

Notes

5 INPUT MENU

Input source Parameter

A)SIRIUS

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

B)XM

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

C)TUNER

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

BGV

D)MULTI CH INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

BGV

INPUT CH

FRONT

E)PHONO

F)CD

G)TV

H)MD/CD-R

I/O ASSIGNMENT

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

DECODER MODE

BGV

I)BD/HD DVD

J)DVD

K)CBL/SAT

L)DVR

M)VCR

N)V-AUX

I/O ASSIGNMENT

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

DECODER MODE

O)DOCK INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

STANDBY CHARGE

P)BLUETOOTH INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

BGV

START PAIRING

82 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Input/output assignment

I/O ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according

to the component to be used if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the

parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively

connect more components.

Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select

the corresponding component by using the CINPUT

selector (or the input selector buttons (3)).

• “NONE” appears in the OSD when no input source is assigned

to the jack.

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the jack names that have

been changed from their previous settings.

• The input source currently assigned to the selected jack is

shown in the parentheses next to “Current”.

Input rename INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input source (up

to 9 characters) that appears in the OSD and in the front

panel display.

• To locate the position to edit , press 8l / h.

• To select a character, press 8k / n.

• To confirm the setting, press 8ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen without change, press

9RETURN.

Press 8n to change the character in the following order, or

press 8k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z,

symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.

Volume trim VOL. TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at

each jack. This feature is useful if you want to balance the

level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in

volume when switching between input sources.

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

This parameter also affects the signals output at the audio

ZONE OUT jacks.

Decoder mode DECODER MODE

Use this feature to switch the decoder activation mode.

“DECODER MODE” is available only when the digital audio

input jacks (HDMI, OPTICAL and/or COAXIAL) are assigned

to the selected input source.

Audio input BGV BGV

Use this feature to select the video source played in the

background of the selected audio input source.

Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE

Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the

battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the

standby mode.

Start pairing START PAIRING

Use this feature to start pairing the connected Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold

separately) with your Bluetooth component. For details

about the pairing, refer to “Pairing the Bluetooth™

receiver and your Bluetooth component” (page 65).

1Press 8ENTER to start pairing.

The connected Bluetooth receiver starts searching

Bluetooth components. “Searching...” appears in the

OSD.

2Check that the Bluetooth component detects

the Bluetooth receiver.

For details, refer to the instruction manual of the

Bluetooth component.

Choice Functions

AUTO Automatically detects digital audio signal input

types and selects the appropriate decoder.

DTS Activates the DTS decoder and plays back only

DTS digital audio signals when digital audio

signals are input.

Note

Choice Functions

BD/HD DVD,

DVD, CBL/

SAT, DVR,

VCR, V-AUX,

DOCK

Selects the corresponding input source as the

background video source.

OFF Does not play the video source in the

background.

Choice Functions

AUTO Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when

this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.

OFF Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only

when this unit is turned on.

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for

the pairing operation. You are recommended to read

and fully understand all the instructions before starting.

83 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

3Select the Bluetooth receiver in the

Bluetooth device list and then enter the pass

key “0000” on the Bluetooth component.

Once this unit completes the pairing successfully,

“Completed” appears.

To cancel the pairing, press 9RETURN.

4Press 9RETURN to exit from “START

PAIRING”.

• If the connected Bluetooth receiver cannot find any Bluetooth

components, “Not found” appears.

• If a Bluetooth receiver is not connected to this unit, “No

Bluetooth receiver” appears.

Input channels INPUT CH

Use this setting to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder (page 23).

Front left and right channels input jack FRONT

If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”, you need to specify the

analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel

signals output from the connected external decoder are

input.

Choices: CD, TV, MD/CD-R, BD/HD DVD, DVD, CBL/

SAT, DVR, VCR, V-AUX

“FRONT” is available only when “INPUT CH” is set to “8CH”.

Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.

■Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

You can reset the “OSD SHIFT” and “GRAY BACK” settings

to the initial factory settings by using “VIDEO” of

“INITIALIZE” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (page 103).

Dimmer DIMMER

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: – 4 to 0

Control step: 1

• To make the front panel display dimmer, press 8l.

• To make the front panel display brighter, press 8h.

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Control range: –5 (downward) to +5 (upward)

Control step: 1

Initial setting: 0

• To lower the position of the OSD, press 8l.

• To raise the position of the OSD, press 8h.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Use this feature to display a gray background in your

video monitor when there is no video signal being input.

Depending on the video signals being input or the system

setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be

displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to

“OFF”.

Notes

Choice Functions

6ch Select this setting if the connected component

outputs discrete 6-channel audio signals.

8ch Select this setting if the connected component

outputs discrete 8-channel audio signals. You

also need to configure the “FRONT” setting

(below).

Note

6 OPTION MENU

Note

Choice Functions

AUTO Displays a gray background on your video

monitor when there is no video signal being

input.

OFF Does not display a gray background on your

video monitor.

Note

84 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

Short message display

SHORT MESSAGE

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message

display function.

The short message display does not appear in the following

cases:

– when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p,

1080i or 1080p resolutions are input

– when HDMI video signals are input

On-screen display time ON SCREEN

Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the

HD Radio (U.S.A. model only), XM Satellite Radio, or

SIRIUS Satellite Radio information or iPod menu in the

OSD after you perform a certain operation.

Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL

Use this feature to set the mode to display the HD Radio

(U.S.A model only), XM Satellite Radio information,

SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, or iPod menu (such

as song title or channel name) in the front panel display.

■Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound

field program parameter and other system settings.

You can change the following parameters even if “MEMORY

GUARD” is set to “ON”:

– “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” (page 82)

– “MEMORY GUARD”

– “SUR.” of the sound field program parameter (page 72)

– "TONE BYPASS" in "SOUND MENU" (page 80)

– Loading the system settings (page 87)

■Initial configuration C)INIT. CONFIG

Use this feature to select the settings of the audio input

jack select, active decoders and extended surround when

you turn on this unit.

Audio select AUDIO SELECT

Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack

select setting (page 36) for the input sources connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of

this unit.

Decoder mode DECODER MODE

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode

(page 82) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.

Choice Functions

ON Activates the short message display function.

The contents of the front panel display appear at

the bottom of the screen each time you operate

this unit.

OFF Deactivates the short message display function.

Note

Choice Functions

ALWAYS Displays the OSD unceasingly during an

operation.

10S Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform

a certain operation.

30S Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform

a certain operation.

Choice Functions

CONT Select this to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

ONCE Select this to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

Choice Functions

OFF Turns off the memory guard feature.

ON Turns on the memory guard feature. While it is

turned on (“”appears at the top right of the

“SET MENU” screen), the following settings are

protected.

– sound field program parameters

– “AUTO SETUP” items

– all speaker levels

– “MANUAL SETUP” items

Note

Choice Functions

AUTO Automatically detects the type of input signals

and selects the appropriate audio input jack

select setting.

LAST Automatically selects the last input jack select

setting used for the connected input source.

Choice Functions

AUTO Automatically detects the type of input signals

and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.

LAST Automatically selects the last decoder mode

setting used for the connected input source.

85 En

Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

Extended surround EXTD SUR.

Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode

(page 67) for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.

■Zone set D)ZONE SET

Use this feature to set the items related in Zone 2 or Zone

"MAX VOL." and "INIT. VOL." are available only when

"VOLUME" is set to "VAR".

Setting zone

Select the zone which you want to configure the settings

for.

Zone 2/Zone 3 amplifier AMP

Use this feature to select how the Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers are amplified. This parameter also effects the

speaker settings and the sound output of sound field

programs in the main zone.

For details on Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections, see “Connecting

the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components” (page 99).

• If “BI AMP” in “ADVANCED SETUP” is set to “ON”

(page 103), the “AMP” setting is fixed to “EXT”.

• When you set “AMP” to “[SP1]” and the corresponding zone is

turned on, no sound is output from the surround back speakers.

• When you set “AMP” to “[SP2]” and the corresponding zone is

turned on, no sound is output from both the surround and the

surround back speakers.

• When you set “AMP” to “BOTH” for either “ZONE 2” or

“ZONE 3”, the “AMP” setting for another zone is fixed to

“EXT”.

• When you set “AMP” to “BOTH” and the corresponding zone is

turned on, no sound is output from both the surround and

surround back speakers.

Zone 2/Zone 3 volume VOLUME

Use this feature to select whether this unit controls the

volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE

OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks when you set “AMP” to

“EXT” (page 85).

Zone 2/Zone 3 maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5dB

Control step: 5.0 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT. VOL.”

setting.

Zone 2/Zone 3 initial volume INIT. VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone

3 when the power of Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on.

Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT. VOL.”

setting.

Choice Functions

AUTO Automatically detects the digital audio input

signals and activates the appropriate decoder.

LAST Automatically selects the decoder mode selected

last time.

Note

Choice Functions

EXT Select this setting when the Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers are connected to the external amplifier

which is connected to the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2

or ZONE 3) jacks of this unit.

[SP1] Select this setting when the Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers are directly connected to the SP1

speaker terminals of this unit.

[SP2] Select this setting when the Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers are directly connected to the SP2

speaker terminals of this unit.

BOTH Select this setting when the Zone 2 or Zone 3

speakers are connected to both the SP1 and SP2

speaker terminals of this unit (for example, the

speakers are connected using the bi-amplifier

connection or there are four speakers in the

room) or when you want to play back the same

source in the Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously.

Notes

Choice Functions

VAR Select this setting if you want to adjust the

ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level

using the remote control of this unit.

FIX Select this setting if you want to adjust the Zone

2 or Zone 3 volume level on the external

amplifier. This unit fixed the ZONE OUT

(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) volume level to a standard

line level.

Note

86 En

Use this feature to save up to six of your favorite settings

that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save the

following system setting parameters:

* The settings of “DYNAMIC RANGE”, “LFE LEVEL”, and

the tonal quality control for headphones are not saved.

■Saving by the 6SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons

You can save the system settings stored in “MEMORY1”

to “MEMORY4” by pressing the corresponding

6SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

Press and hold one of the 6SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds.

“MEMORY 1 SAVE Done” (example) appears in the front

panel display, and then this unit saves the current system

setting to the corresponding memory number.

If system settings are already stored in the selected memory

number, this unit overwrites the old settings.

■Saving by the SET MENU operation

You can save the system settings stored in “MEMORY1”

to “MEMORY6” by using the “SYSTEM MEMORY”

menu in “SET MENU”.

1Set the operation mode selector on the

remote control to EAMP and then press

HMENU.

The top “SET MENU” screen appears in the OSD.

2Press 8n to select “SYSTEM MEMORY” and

then press 8ENTER.

The “SYSTEM MEMORY” menu appears.

3Press 8n to select “SAVE” and then press

8ENTER.

The current system settings are displayed.

4Press 8l / h repeatedly to select the

desired memory number (“MEMORY1” to

“MEMORY6”).

The system settings currently stored in the selected

memory number are displayed. If the memory

number is not in use, “EMPTY” appears.

• If system settings are already stored in the selected

memory number, this unit overwrites the old settings.

• To load the system settings with the 6SYSTEM

MEMORY button operation, use one of “MEMORY1” to

“MEMORY4”.

5Press 8ENTER to save the current system

settings to the selected memory number.

Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)

Saved parameters Page

“SPEAKER MENU” parameters

(except “TEST TONE”) 75

“VOLUME MENU” parameters

(except “INIT. VOL.”) 77

“SOUND MENU” parameters* 78

“VIDEO MENU” parameters 80

“DISPLAY SET” parameters

(except “SHORT MESSAGE”) 83

Sound field program (or “Pure Direct”)

currently selected 39

Sound field parameter settings 67

Tonal quality control settings* 46

Saving the system settings

SYSTEM MEMORY

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

SYSTEM MEMORY

SAVE;;;;;;;CURRENT

Church in Freiburg

ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO

EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ

PEQ TYPE;;;NATURAL

Select

Return

Current system settings

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

SYSTEM MEMORY

SAVE;;;;;;;MEMORY1

Drama

ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO

EQUALIZER;;;;;;GEQ

PEQ TYPE;;;;;;NONE

Select

Save

System settings stored in the

selected memory number

87 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

6Press HMENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

If you load the system settings, the settings currently configured

are overwritten. If you do not want to erase the current settings,

save the settings using the SYSTEM MEMORY feature in

advance.

■Loading by the 6SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons

You can recall the system settings stored in “MEMORY1”

to “MEMORY4” by pressing the corresponding

6SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

1Press one of the 6SYSTEM MEMORY

buttons on the remote control to select the

desired memory number.

“MEMORY 1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front

panel display.

“EMPTY” appears in the menu screen if no system

settings are stored in the selected memory number.

2Press the selected 6SYSTEM MEMORY

button once more to confirm the selection.

This unit loads the settings stored in the selected

memory number.

■Loading by the SET MENU operation

1Set the operation mode selector on the

remote control to EAMP and then press

HMENU.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2Press 8n to select “SYSTEM MEMORY” and

then press 8ENTER.

The “SYSTEM MEMORY” menu appears.

3Press 3ENTER to select “LOAD”.

The current system settings are displayed.

4Press 8l / h repeatedly to select the

desired memory number where the system

settings are stored and then press

8ENTER.

This unit loads the selected system settings.

5Press HMENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

Loading the system settings

Note

SYSTEM MEMORY

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

SYSTEM MEMORY

LOAD;;;;;;;CURRENT

Church in Freiburg

ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO

EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ

PEQ TYPE;;;NATURAL

Select

Return

[p]/[[]:

[ENTER]:

SYSTEM MEMORY

LOAD;;;;;;;MEMORY6

Straight

ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO

EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ

PEQ TYPE;;;;;;FLAT

Select

Load

88 En

Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)

■Example 1: Comparing the results of the

automatic setup and manual setup

This unit is equipped with three types of parametric

equalizer settings (page 79), and you can also make your

customized configuration of the sound settings of this unit

by using the “MANUAL SETUP” parameters (see

page 74). To compare the results of the automatic setup or

your manual configuration, use the 6SYSTEM

MEMORY buttons.

Saving each setting

1Perform the automatic setup (page 30).

2Press and hold 6SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the results of the automatic setup

(PEQ SELECT: NATURAL) to “MEMORY1”.

3Set “PEQ SELECT” to “FRONT” (page 79).

4Press and hold 6SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the results of the automatic setup

(PEQ SELECT: FRONT) to “MEMORY2”.

5Configure the parameters of “SPEAKER

MENU” (page 75) and “GEQ EDIT” (page 78)

manually.

6Press and hold 6SYSTEM MEMORY 3 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the settings configured manually to

“MEMORY3”.

■Example 2: Switching the settings for

different room environments

The tonal characteristics of the listening room may vary

depending on the situations of the room (for example,

whether the curtains are open or closed), and the settings

of this unit should be arranged for each situation of the

room. You can switch between the settings of this unit

easily by using 6SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.

Saving each setting

1Close the curtains of the listening room and

then perform the automatic setup (page 30).

2Press and hold 6SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the settings for the current room

situation (i.e. the curtains are closed) to

“MEMORY1”.

3Open the curtains of the listening room and

the perform the automatic setup.

4Press and hold 6SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for

4 seconds.

This unit stores the current room situation (i.e. the

curtains are open) to “MEMORY2”.

Using examples

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

Results of the automatic setup

(PEQ SELECT: NATURAL)

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

Results of the automatic setup

(PEQ SELECT: FRONT)

SYSTEM MEMORY 3

Settings configured manually

SYSTEM MEMORY

SYSTEM MEMORY 1

The settings when the curtains of the

listening room are closed

SYSTEM MEMORY 2

The settings when the curtains of

the listening room are open

89 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code

for each input source (page 91).

■Controlling this unit

Set the operation mode selector to EAMP to control this

unit.

*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the

operation mode selector position.

*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component

operation mode selector is set to EAMP.

■Controlling a TV

Set the operation mode selector to ETV to control your

TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate

remote control code for the TV operation mode in advance

(page 91).

If no code has been set for the TV operation mode, the remote

control operates the component that is set to the TV control area

(page 91).

*1 2TV POWER can always turn on or off the power of the TV

regardless of the operation mode selector position.

*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode

selector is set to ETV. For details, see the “TV” column on

page 90.

*3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode

selector is set to ETV or ESOURCE.

Remote control features

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

MEMORY

RETURN

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

3D DSP

Set to AMP

Notes

Remote control Functions

TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level.

TV CH +/– Changes the TV channel.

TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.

TV INPUT Changes the input source.

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

RETURN DISPLAY

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

3D DSP

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

MEMORY

PARAMETER

Set to TV

90 En

Remote control features

■Controlling other components

Set the operation mode selector to ESOURCE to control

other components selected with the input selector buttons

(3) or . You must set the appropriate remote control

code for each input source in advance (page 91). The

following table shows the function of each control button

used to control other components assigned to each input

selector button (3) or . Be advised that some buttons

may not correctly operate the selected component.

The remote control has 16 modes (input areas) to control

components so that the remote control can operate up to 16

different components.

*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a power button.

*2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder, etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR

(page 91).

*3 These functions are used for selecting HD Radio audio programs (U.S.A. model only).

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

RETURN DISPLAY

MUTE

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

MEMORY

PARAMETER

3D DSP

[1][2]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[3]

Set to SOURCE

Blu-ray Disc/

HD DVD

player/

recorder

DVD player LD player

DVD

recorder/

Digital

video

recorder

VCR TV

Cable TV/

Satellite

tuner

CD player

recorder/

recorder

Tape deck Tuner

[1] AV P OW E R Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 DVR power

*2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1

[2] TITLE,

BAND Title Title Title Title Band

[3] PRESET/

CH kMenu up Menu up Menu up Channel up Menu up Channel up Menu up

PRESET/

CH nMenu down Menu down Menu down Channel

down Menu down Channel

down Menu down

CAT. A-E

lMenu left Menu left Menu left Menu left Menu left

CAT. A-E

hMenu right Menu right Menu right Menu right Direction

A/B Menu right

ENTER Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter Menu enter

[4] RETURN,

MEMORY Return Return Return Return Memory

[5] REC Record

(recorder) Disc skip Record Record DVR record

DVR record

*2 Disc skip Record Record

ePause Pause Pause Pause Pause DVR pause

DVR pause

*2 Pause Pause Pause

pPlay Play Play Play Play DVR play *2 DVR play *2 Play Play Play

sStop Stop Stop Stop Stop DVR stop *2 DVR stop *2 Stop Stop Stop

ll Search

backward

DVR search

backward *2

DVR search

backward *2

backward

hh Search

forward

DVR search

forward *2

DVR search

forward *2

forward

bSkip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

Skip

backward

DVR skip

backward *2

DVR skip

backward *2

Skip

backward

Skip

backward Direction A

Audio

program

down *3

aSkip forward Skip

forward

Skip

forward

Skip

forward

Skip

forward

DVR skip

forward *2

DVR skip

forward *2

Skip

forward

Skip

forward Direction B

Audio

program up

[6] 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

[7] MENU,

SRCH

MODE

Menu Menu Menu Menu Search

mode

[8]DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

[9] ENT Index Index Chapter/

time Index Enter Enter Enter Index Index Enter

[10] AUDIO Audio Audio Audio Audio

Notes

91 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

■Selecting a component to be controlled

You can select a component to be controlled

independently of the input source selected with the input

selector buttons (3).

Press 5SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the

desired component.

The name of the component to be controlled appears in the

display window (4) on the remote control.

■Controlling optional components

(Option mode)

“OPTN1” and “OPTN2” are optional component control

areas that can be programmed with remote control

functions independently from any input source. These

areas are useful for programming commands that are to be

used only as a part of a macro function or for components

that do not have a valid remote control code.

To select the option mode, press 5SELECT l /

h repeatedly until “OPTN1” or “OPTN2” appears

in the display window (4) on the remote control.

You cannot set a remote control code for the optional areas. See

page 93 to program buttons operated within this component

control area.

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available remote

control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at

the end of this manual.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each control area.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if

a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above.

In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code.

1Check the remote control code for your

component in advance.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

see “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

2Set the operation mode selector on the

remote control to ESOURCE.

If you want to set the remote control code for “TV”,

set the operation mode selector to ETV.

Note

DVD

OPTN1 OPTN2

Setting remote control codes

Control

area

Library

(component

category)

Manufacturer

Default

code

MULTI DVD Yamaha 04306

V-AU X — — —

PHONO — — —

DOCK SOURCE Yamaha 00012

HD DVD BD Yamaha 04706

DVD DVD Yamaha 04306

CD CD Yamaha 01205

CD-R CD-R Yamaha 01405

CBL

SAT ———

TV — — —

DVR DVR Yamaha 00707

VCR — — —

TUNER SOURCE Yamaha 00012

XM SOURCE Yamaha 00012

SIRIUS SOURCE Yamaha 00012

———

Note

92 En

Remote control features

3Press FSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4) on the

remote control.

In the “SETUP” menu, complete each of the operations

within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the remote control

automatically exits from the “SETUP” menu.

4Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “P-SET”

and then press 8ENTER.

The remote control enters the preset mode. “P-SET”

and name of the currently selected control area

appears in the display window (4) alternately.

5Press an input selector button (3) or

5SELECT l / h repeatedly to select the

control area you want to customize.

If you selected “TV” in step 2, skip this step.

6Press 8ENTER.

The current code setting appears.

7Press the numeric buttons (A) to enter the

five-digit remote control code for your

component.

8Press 8ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window (4) if setting

was successful.

“NG” appears in the display window (4) if the

setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from

step 5.

If you continuously want to set up another code for

another control area, repeat steps 5 through 8.

9Press FSETUP again to exit from the

“SETUP” mode.

10 Press 2AV POWER or 0p to confirm

whether you can control your component

using the remote control.

• If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your

component has more than one code, try each of them until you

find the correct one.

• If you set "00012" as the remote control code of the selected

control area, you can operate the currently selected internal

source (DOCK, TUNER, XM, or SIRIUS).

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes

for commercially available audio and video components

(including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the learning feature (page 93) or use the

remote control supplied with the component.

• Functions programmed using the learning mode take priority

over remote control code functions.

Note

SETUP

P-SET

DVD

04306

Notes

93 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

You can program remote control codes from other remote

controls. Use the learning feature if you want to program

functions not included in the basic operations covered by

the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control

code is not available. You can program the function of

other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas

in the following illustration. The buttons can be

programmed independently for each control area.

• The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn

most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program

some special signals or extremely long transmissions.

• You cannot program the desired remote control code even if you

select the buttons in the highlighted area in the above

illustration depending on the selected control area and the

assigned library.

1Set the operation mode selector to

ESOURCE and then press an input selector

button (3) to select the desired control area.

If you want to program the remote control code for

“TV”, set the operation mode selector to ETV.

Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to

ESOURCE or ETV. When you set the operation mode

selector to EAMP and program a remote control codes

from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot

operate the amplifier function of this unit.

2Press FSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

3Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “LEARN”

and then press 8ENTER.

4Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2

to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other and

then press 8ENTER.

“L–KEY” appears in the display window (4).

5Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“START” appears in the display window (4).

6Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until

“OK” appears in the display window (4).

“NG” appears in the display window (4) if learning

was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

When you want to program another function, repeat steps

4 througn 6.

Programming codes from other

remote controls

Notes

Note

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AU X DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

MEMORY

RETURN

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER CAT.

A-E

REC

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

MEMORY

RETURN

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

MUTE

3D DSP

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDI O

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

Set to

SOURCE

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

RETURN DISPLAY

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER CAT.

A-E

PARAMETER

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)

Other remote control

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

RETURN DISPLAY

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER CAT.

A-E

PARAMETER

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

Other remote control

94 En

Remote control features

7Press FSETUP again to exit the setup

menu.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this

case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room

for further learning (page 97).

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– when the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

You can change the name of the control area (input

source) that appears in the display window (4) on the

remote control.

1Set the operation mode selector to

ESOURCE and then press an input selector

button (3) to select the desired control area.

2Press FSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window.

3Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “RNAME”

and then press 8ENTER.

4Press 8k / n repeatedly to select 3-letter

name or 5-letter name you want to edit and

then press 8ENTER.

Each control area has both 3-letter name and 5-letter

name. You can rename the 3-letter name and 5-letter

name independently.

5Edit the name of the control area.

To locate the position to edit , press 8l / h.

To select a character, press 8k / n.

Press 8k to change the character in the following order,

or press 8n to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to

9, space, symbols (–, +, /, :).

6Press 8ENTER to set the new name.

“OK” appears in the display window (4) on the

remote control if renaming was successful.

When you want to rename the another control area, press

the input selector button (3) or 5SELECT l / h

repeatedly to select the desired control area and then press

8ENTER and then carry out the operations of steps 4

through 6.

7Press FSETUP again to exit the setup

menu.

“ERROR” appears in the display window (4) on the remote

control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,

or when you press more than one button simultaneously.

Notes

Changing source names in the

display window

BD BD/HD

3-letter name 5-letter name

Note

BD/HD

95 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

The macro programming feature makes it possible to

perform a series of operations with the press of a single

button. For example, when you want to play a CD,

normally you would turn on the components, select the

CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The

macro programming feature lets you perform all of these

operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The

buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with

macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(page 96).

■Recalling programmed macro-

operations

1Press GMACRO on the remote control.

2Press the desired macro button.

“M:the 3-letter name of the selected control area” (for

example, “M:DVD”) appears in the display window

(4), and this unit transmits the programmed

functions. When you press CSTANDBY or

DPOWER, “M:STB” or “M:PWR” appears in the

display window (4), and this unit transmits the

programmed functions.

3Press GMACRO again to exit from the

macro-operation mode.

• While the remote control is running a macro program (the

transmission indicator flashes), it does not accept any other

operation.

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

• If you do not complete each of the operations within 30

seconds, this unit automatically exits from the macro-operation

mode.

■Default macro functions

*1 Set the appropriate remote control code for TV in advance

(page 91).

*2 This unit plays the last received station or selected contents

before the unit was set in the standby mode.

Macro programming features

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

MACRO

Macro buttons

MACRO

Pressing

macro

button

To automatically transmit these

signals in order

First Second

—

STANDBY STANDBY

POWER

(*1)

MULTI MULTI

V-AUX V- AUX

PHONO PHONO

DOCK DOCK

HD DVD BD

HD DVD

DVD DVD

CD CD

CD-R MD

CD-R

CBL

SAT CBL

SAT

TV TV

DVR DVR

VCR VCR

TUNER TUNER

(*2)

XM XM

(*2)

SIRIUS

(*2)

SIRIUS

96 En

Remote control features

■Programming macro operations

You can program your own macro to transmit several

remote control commands in sequence at the press of a

button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform

learning operations before programming the macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

• We do not recommend that you program continuous operations

(for example, volume control) in a macro.

1Press FSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

2Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “MACRO”

and then press 8ENTER.

3Press the desired macro button you want to

assign the macro program to and then press

8ENTER.

“M:the three-letter name of the selected macro

button” (for example, “M:DVD”) and the name of the

currently selected control area appears in the display

window (4) alternately.

When you press CSTANDBY or DPOWER,

“M:STB” or “M:PWR” and the name of the currently

selected control area appears in the display window

(4) alternately.

4Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

Example

Set the input source to DVD → Turn on the DVD

player → Turn on the video monitor

Step 1 (“MCR1”): Press DVD.

Step 2 (“MCR2”): Press AV POWER.

Step 3 (“MCR3”): Press TV POWER.

•

To change the selected input area, press

SELECT

Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,

whereas

SELECT

only changes the selected input area.

• The position of the operation mode selector (AMP/TV/

SOURCE) affects the assigned function. When the

operation mode selector is set to EAMP or ETV, the

input source selectors do not function.

5Press GMACRO to confirm the program.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote

control automatically exits from the macro

programming mode.

6Press FSETUP again to exit from the setup

mode.

“ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

Notes

Note

Indicates the number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can set the

next step

(Selected macro button)

(Selected control area)

MCR 1

M:DVD

DVD

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

STANDBY

POWER

97 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, macros, renamed control area names

and setup remote control ID.

■Clearing function sets

1Press FSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

2Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “CLEAR”

and then press 8ENTER.

3Press 8k / n repeatedly to select the desired

clear mode.

4Press and hold 8ENTER for about 3

seconds.

When the clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the

display window (4).

• “NG” appears in the display window (4) if clearing was

unsuccessful.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press a

button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more

than one button simultaneously.

5Press FSETUP again to exit from the setup

mode.

■Clearing a learned function

1Press FSETUP using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“SETUP” appears in the display window (4).

2Press 8k / n repeatedly to select “ERASE”

and then press 8ENTER.

3Set the operation mode selector to

ESOURCE and then press an input selector

button (3).

If you want to erase the function learned in the AMP

or TV control area, set the operation mode selector to

EAMP or ETV.

4Press 8ENTER.

“E-KEY” appears in the display window (4).

5Press and hold the button you want to clear

for about 3 seconds.

If clearing is successful, “OK” appears in the display

window (4).

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 3 through 5.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

6Press FSETUP again to exit from the setup

mode.

• “NG” appears in the display window (4) on the remote control

if clearing was unsuccessful.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window (4) if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

Clearing configurations

Clear mode Descriptions

L:DVD (etc.) (L:Three-digit name of the selected control area)

Clears all learned functions the respective

control area. You can change the control area to

be cleared by pressing the desired input selector

button (3) or 5SELECT l / h repeatedly.

L:AMP Sets all learned functions for controlling the

amplifier functions to the initial factory settings.

Set the operation mode selector to EAMP to

select this clear mode.

L:TV Clears all learned functions for TV control area.

Set the operation mode selector to ETV to

select this clear mode.

L:ALL Clears all learned functions.

M:DVD (etc.) (M:Name of the selected macro button) Clears

the macro programmed for the selected macro

button (page 96). The assigned macro to the

selected macro button reverts to the initial

factory macro. Press the desired macro button if

you want to change the macro button you want to

clear the programmed functions of.

M:ALL Clears all programmed macros. The assigned

macro to the selected macro button reverts to the

initial factory macro.

RNAME Set all the name of the control areas to the

default settings.

FCTRY Set all settings of the remote control to the initial

factory settings.

Notes

98 En

Remote control features

Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit.

■Setting the controlling zone of the

simplified remote control

Use this feature to set the controlling zone (page 100) and

remote control ID (page 102) of the simplified remote

control.

Setting the remote control ID

• ID1: Press and hold b and 1 for 3 seconds.

• ID2: Press and hold b and 2 for 3 seconds.

Setting the controlling zone

• Main zone: Press and hold a and 1 for 3 seconds.

• Zone 2: Press and hold a and 2 for 3 seconds.

• Zone 3: Press and hold a and 3 for 3 seconds.

■Replacing the battery in the simplified

remote control

Change the battery when the operation range of the

simplified remote control decreases.

• Insert the battery according to the polarity markings

(+ and –).

• If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the

simplified remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak.

• If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful

not to let the leaking battery acid touch your skin or clothing.

• Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.

• Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.

Simplified remote control

INPUT

MUTE

INT SOURCE

PRESET

SYSTEM MEMORY

41 32

POWERSTANDBY

VOLUME

STANDBY

Sets the selected zone to the

standby mode.

☞ P. 26, 100

SYSTEM MEMORY

Save or recall the system

settings.

☞ P. 86

INPUTl / h

Select the input source.

☞ P. 35

PRESET +/–

Recall the preset FM/AM

stations, XM channels or

SIRIUS channels.

☞ P. 49, 54, 59

s(stop) / p(play) /

b(skip backward) /

a(skip forward)

Control playback of the

iPod.

☞ P. 63

POWER

Turn on the power.

☞ P. 26, 100

VOLUME +/–

Adjust the volume level.

☞ P. 35

MUTE

Mutes the audio output.

☞ P. 37

Remove the insulation sheet before using the remote

control.

Notes

Use a straight

pin to remove

the cover.

Replace the

battery with a

new CR2025

battery.

Close the

cover.

99 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this

unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone 2) and third zone (Zone 3). You can control

this unit from the second or third zone using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone.

• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the

infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.

• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone and/or third zone.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.

• Some Yamaha models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to

use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.

■Using external amplifiers

To use an external amplifier in the second zone and/or third zone, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT jacks and

set “AMP” to “EXT” (page 85).

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

• Adjust the the second zone and/or third zone volume by using the amplifier in each zone when “VOLUME” are set to “FIX” (page 85).

Using multi-zone configuration

Only analog signals are sent to the second and third zones. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone and

third zone must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components

Notes

OUTOUT IN

REMOTE

OUT IN

REMOTE REMOTE

This unit Yamaha

component

Yamaha

component

Infrared signal

receiver

MAIN

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

Infrared signal

emitter

DVD player etc.

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Second zone

(Zone 2)

Third zone

(Zone 3)

Main zone

This unit

From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks

From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 3) jacks

To the REMOTE IN jack

To the REMOTE IN jackFrom the REMOTE OUT jack

Analog audio signals only

100 En

Using multi-zone configuration

■Using the internal amplifiers of this unit

If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and set “AMP” to “[SP1]” or “[SP2]”

(page 85).

If you want to use two internal amplifiers (SP1 and SP2) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and set “AMP” to “BOTH”

(page 85).

You can select the zone you want to control by using the

control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.

■Basic operation

Front panel operations

1Press PZONE 2 or PZONE 3 on the front

panel to individually turn on or off Zone 2 or

Zone 3.

2Press PZONE CONTROLS on the front

panel repeatedly to select the zone you want

to control.

Each time you press PZONE CONTROLS, the

front panel display changes as shown below, and the

indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for

approximately 10 seconds. However, no indicator

flashes when the main zone is selected.

ZONE2

Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.

ZONE3

Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.

You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the

selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,

the currently selected zone mode is automatically

canceled.

3Perform the desired operation in the selected

zone (page 101).

To turn off the desired zone, press PZONE 2 or PZONE

3 again.

Remote control operations

1Press GZONE repeatedly to select the zone

you want to control.

“MAIN”, “ZONE 2”, or “ZONE 3” indicator appears

in the display window (4) on the remote control.

Important safety notice

The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or

more than one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low

impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This

information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.

–

SP2

SINGLE

–

BI-AMP

SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

SP1

–

Third zone

(Zone 3)

This unit

Second zone

(Zone 2)

Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3

ZONE2 ZONE3

No indicator flashes

when the main zone is selected.

MAIN

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

(Zone 2) (Zone 3) (Main zone)

101 En

Using multi-zone configuration

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

2Press EPOWER to turn on the selected

zone.

3Perform the desired operation in the selected

zone (page 101).

To turn off the desired zone, press CSTANDBY.

■Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate the CINPUT selector (or set the

operation mode selector to EAMP and then

press one of the input selector buttons (3)).

• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the FM/AM

tuning features (page 47) in the selected zone.

• Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM

Satellite Radio features (page 52) in the selected zone.

• Select “SIRIUS” as the input source to use the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio features (page 57) in the selected zone.

• Select “DOCK” as the input source to use the iPod

features (page 63) or Bluetooth features (page 65) in

the selected zone.

The input sources are shared across all zones. You cannot select

the same input source in multiple zones simultaneously.

■Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate QVOLUME (or press IVOLUME +/–) .

Press KMUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output

to the selected zone.

When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,

IVOLUME +/– can be used only when “VOLUME” is set to

“VAR” in “ZONE SET” (page 85).

■Adjusting the front speaker balance of

Zone 2 or Zone 3

Press ETONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

“BALANCE” and then rotate the NPROGRAM

selector for adjustment.

■Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Press ETONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the

low-frequency response (BASS) and then rotate

the NPROGRAM selector for adjustment.

Control range: -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

■Setting the sleep timer for Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Use this feature to turn of the desired zone after a certain

amount of time.

Set the operation mode to EAMP and then press

BSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time.

The sleep timer setting changes as shown below.

Note

120min. 90min.

60min.30min.OFF

102 En

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional

operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each

parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

•Only

AMASTER ON/OFF, OSTRAIGHT and the NPROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup

menu.

• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.

1Press AMASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

2Press and hold OSTRAIGHT and then

press AMASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”

appears in the front panel display.

3Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select

the parameter you want to adjust.

4Press OSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change

the selected parameter setting.

5Press AMASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to save the new

setting and turn off this unit.

The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

■Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.

Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit

so that it matches that of your speakers.

■Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor on the

front panel of this unit.

We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.

■Wake on RS-232C access

RS-232C STANDBY

Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-

232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES

[Other models]: NO

■Remote control ID setting

REMOTE CON AMP

Use this feature to set the remote control ID of this unit for

remote control recognition.

Setting remote control ID

Use this feature to set the remote control ID. This feature

is useful when you control multiple Yamaha AV receiver

or amplifier with using the remote control.

Advanced setup

Notes

Using the advanced setup menu

Choice Descriptions

8ΩMIN Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to

8Ω. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω

or higher.

6ΩMIN Select this setting to set the speaker impedance to

6Ω. The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω

or higher (front speakers only: 4 Ω or higher).

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

Choice Descriptions

ON Select this setting if you want to activate the

signal-receiving capability of the remote control

sensor.

OFF Select this setting if you want to deactivate the

signal-receiving capability of the remote control

sensor.

Note

Choice Functions

YES Select this setting to set this unit to transmit data

via the RS-232C interface.

NO Select this setting to set this unit not to transmit

data via the RS-232C interface.

Choice Descriptions

ID1 Select this setting when the ID of the remote

control is set to “ID1”

ID2 Select this setting when the ID of the remote

control is set to “ID2”

103 En

Advanced setup

ADVANCED

OPERATION English

Press FID repeatedly using a ballpoint pen or

similar object on the remote control to select the

desired remote control ID.

Each time you press FID, the remote control ID indicator

changes as shown below.

To set the remote control ID of the simplified remote control,

see page 98 for details.

■SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock

code number reset SIRIUS PIN

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use this feature to set the code number for the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio Parental Lock feature to the initial factory

setting.

■Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according

to the frequency spacing in your area.

■Bi-amplifier mode BI-AMP

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier

function.

When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK

terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in

that the terminals are already used for the bi-amplifier

connection (page 15).

■Parameter initialization INITIALIZE

Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the

initial factory settings. You can select the category of

parameters to be initialized.

To initialize the parameters of each sound field program, use

"INITIALIZE" in the sound field program menu (page 67).

■HDMI monitor check MONITOR CHECK

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check

function of this unit.

Choice Descriptions

RESET Sets the code number to the initial factory setting.

CANCEL Cancels the reset of the code number.

Choice Descriptions

AM10/

FM100

Select this setting for North, Central and South

America.

AM9/FM50 Select this setting for all other countries.

Choice Descriptions

ON Select this setting if you want to activate the bi-

amplifier function.

OFF Select this setting if you want to deactivate the bi-

amplifier function.

Note

ID1

ID2

Choice Descriptions

DSP

PARAM

Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of

the sound field parameters (page 67).

VIDEO Select this setting to initialize all the parameters in

“VIDEO MENU” and “OSD SHIFT” and “GRAY

BACK” in “DISPLAY SET”.

ALL Select this setting to initialize all the parameters of

this unit.

CANCEL Select this setting to cancel the initialization

procedure.

Choice Descriptions

YES This unit receives the information of the available

video signal resolutions from the video monitor

connected via HDMI and you can only select the

resolutions supported by the video monitor in

“HDMI RES.” (page 81).

SKIP You can select any resolution in “HDMI RES.”

(page 81).

TROUBLESHOOTING

104 En

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

■General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly. —

The speaker impedance setting is

incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 26

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this

unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire

for each connection does not touch anything other

than its respective connection.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

or strong static electricity).

Turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, plug it

back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally.

—

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

19-24

Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,

“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 36

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG” while the input source

component outputs digital audio signals.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” or

“COAX/OPT”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the CINPUT

selector (or the input selector buttons (3) ).

35, 36

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13

The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. —

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component,

such as a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this

unit.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

105 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

No picture. The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” or connect your source

components in the same way as you connect your

video monitor to this unit.

1080p-resolution analog video signals are

only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jacks.

Connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR jacks.

480p-, 576p-, 1080i- and 720p-resolution

video signals cannot be output at the S

VIDEO and VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks.

Connect your video monitor to the HDMI OUT or

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

—

This unit outputs the video signals are not

supported on the video monitor connected

to the HDMI OUT jack.

Select “INITIALIZE” in “VIDEO” to reset the video

parameters.

103

Set “MONITOR CHECK” to “YES”. 103

Pure Direct mode is active. Turn off the Pure Direct mode. 46

Set “MODE” in “PURE DIRECT” to

“AUDIO+VIDEO”.

Non-standard video signals are input.

Short message

displays do not

appear on the video

monitor.

“SHORT MESSAGE” is set to “OFF”. Set “SHORT MESSAGE” to “ON”. 84

“GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”. Set “GRAY BACK” to “AUTO”. 83

“VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF”. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. 80

The signals input at the HDMI input jacks

are being output at the HDMI OUT jack.

Video signals in the progressive format or

HDTV video signals are being input.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 26, 102

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. —

Sound is heard from

the speaker on one

side only.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

The speaker level settings are incorrect. Adjust “LEVEL” settings. 76

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound is heard

from the center

speaker.

“CENTER SP” in “CONFIG” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “CENTER SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”. 75

No sound is heard

from the presence

speakers.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode. Press OSTRAIGHT to turn off the “STRAIGHT”

mode.

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program. 35

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

106 En

Troubleshooting

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “CONFIG” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”. 75

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode

and a monaural source is being played

back.

Press OSTRAIGHT to turn off the “STRAIGHT”

mode.

The surround speakers are connected to

the SURROUND BACK speaker

terminals.

Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND

speaker terminals.

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “CONFIG” is set to

“FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 75

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “CONFIG” is set to

“SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2-channel

source is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 75

The source does not contain low-

frequency signals.

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speakers.

"SUR.B L/R SP" is set to "NONE". Check whether "SUR. L/R SP" is set to "SMALL" or

"LARGE" and configure "SUR.B L/R SP" properly.

75, 76

While this unit is in the CINEMA DSP 3D

mode, no sound is output at the surround

back speakers.

The audio input

sources cannot be

played in the desired

digital audio signal

format (Desired input

source indicator or

decoder indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up).

The connected component is not set to

output the desired digital audio signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operating

instructions for your component.

—

Audio input jack select is set to

“ANALOG”.

Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 36

A humming sound is

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the

GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is

low while a record is

being played.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

Connect your turntable to this unit through an MC-

head amplifier.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned

off.

Turn on the power of the component. —

A source cannot be

recorded by the

recording component.

The audio source connected to the MULTI

CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be

recorded.

A given input source is not output at the

same output channel (e.g. DVR IN to

DVR OUT).

Connect the recording component to another channel

that is not being used for connecting the source

component.

You are trying to record a DTS source.

(DTS signal is a digital bitstream.

Attempting to record the DTS bitstream

digitally will result in noise being

recorded.)

Make a setting so that the analog signal will be output

from your DTS-compatible player and then connect

the DTS-compatible player to the AUDIO IN jacks

while the recording component is connected to the

analog AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R)

jacks.

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

107 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

An audio source

cannot be recorded by

the digital recording

component connected

to the DIGITAL

OUTPUT jacks.

The audio source component is not

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Connect the audio source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

Some components cannot records Dolby

Digital or DTS sources.

You are trying to record an audio source

input at the DOCK terminal by the digital

recording component connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

Connect the recording component to the analog

AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks.

(U.S.A. model only)

HD Radio signals are not output at the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

Connect the recording component to the analog

AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R) jacks.

An audio source

cannot be recorded by

the analog recording

component connected

to the analog AUDIO

OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/

CD-R) jacks.

The audio source component is not

connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks.

Connect the audio source component to the AUDIO

IN jacks.

XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite

Radio signals are not output at the analog

AUDIO OUT (DVR, VCR or MD/CD-R)

jacks.

Recorded materials

sound differently.

The settings made on this unit (such as

tonal quality, volume level and sound field

programs) do not affect recorded material.

A video source cannot

be recorded by the

recording component.

"VIDEO CONV." is set to "ON". While "VIDEO CONV." is set to "ON", video signals

are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. To

record a video source by the recording component, set

"VIDEO CONV." to "OFF" and make the same type

of video connections between each component (e.g.

VCR IN (S VIDEO) to DVR OUT (S VIDEO).

21, 80

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings of this

unit cannot be

changed.

“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”

is set to “ON”.

Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 84

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment. —

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

108 En

Troubleshooting

■HDMI

■Tuner (FM/AM)

■HD Radio (U.S.A. model only)

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

No picture or sound. The number of the connected HDMI

components is over the limit.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI

components.

—

HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support

the HDCP copy protection standards.

—

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections. 24

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method. 47

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multi-path interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. —

Use the manual tuning method. 47

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again. 48

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for the best reception.

Use the manual tuning method. 47

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Supplied AM loop antenna is not

connected.

Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even

if you use an outdoor antenna.

Noises can result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

This unit cannot

receive the HD Radio

signals of the

selected radio

station.

The radio station provides analog FM/

AM radio service only.

Select other radio stations that provides the HD

Radio service.

The signal is too weak. Adjust the antenna position. —

Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna. —

This unit cannot

select other audio

programs than the

main program.

The radio station provides an audio

program only.

HD Radio information

does not appear.

The radio station does not provide the

information.

109 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

■ XM Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in

the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the is

not connected to this unit.

Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the

dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

cable is connected to this unit.

CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM

antenna cable has become damaged.

Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to

the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the

antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna

if the cable is damaged.

LOADING The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or

program information from the XM

satellite signal. This message can also

occur in weak XM signal conditions.

Note that this unit may not respond to

some operations while this message is

displayed.

This message should disappear in a few seconds in

good signal conditions. If you see this message often,

reposition the XM antenna to get better signal

reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information

in the front panel or “XM Information” screen in the

OSD to check the antenna reception level.

NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the

XM satellite signal. Something may be

blocking the XM antenna’s view of the

satellites or the antenna is not properly

aimed.

Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the

XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the

“ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel or

“XM Information” screen in the OSD to check the

antenna reception level. See instructions supplied

with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna

installation information.

CH OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not

currently broadcasting.

Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select

another channel.

—

CH UNAUTH You may be attempting to tune to an XM

channel that is blocked or that you cannot

receive with your XM subscription

package.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and

http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the

current list of channels. For information on receiving

this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ (US

residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian

residents) or contact XM Satellite Radio at

1-800-967-2346 (US residents) and 1-877-438-9677

(Canadian residents).

CH UNAVAIL The selected channel is not available. The

channel may have been reassigned to a

different channel number. This message

may occur initially with a new XM Mini-

Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not

received XM’s signal for an extended

period.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and

http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the

current list of channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-

Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received

XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM

Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at

least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel

again.

—

- - - - No artist name or song title is available

for this selection.

No action required. —

110 En

Troubleshooting

■SIRIUS Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the

SiriusConnect tuner properly.

Check the connection of the antenna and

SiriusConnect tuner.

CHECK SR TUNER The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected

to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly.

Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and

this unit.

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected

to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner

to the AC wall outlet.

NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit

supports.

ACQUIRING The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the

SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”

information in the front panel display or “SIRIUS

Information” screen in the OSD to check the antenna

reception level.

UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

channel list.

Wait until the updating is complete. —

The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the

subscription.

F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

firmware.

Wait until the updating is complete. —

CALL SIRIUS

(CALL 888-539-

SIRIUS TO

SUBSCRIBE)

The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the

selected channel.

URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

Select another channel. 58

SUB UPDATED The subscription information is updated.

INVALID The selected channel is currently out of

service.

Select another channel. 58

Not Available The operation you made is not available.

111 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

■Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit. —

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 5

The operation mode selector is set

incorrectly.

Set the operation mode selector correctly. When

operating this unit, set it to the EAMP position.

When operating the component selected by the input

selector button, set it to the ESOURCE position.

When operating the TV set in the 3TV area, set it to

the ETV position.

—

The control zone setting is incorrect. Select the zone you want to control. 100

The remote control code is not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using

“List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this

manual.

The remote control ID of the remote

control and this unit do not match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit and the

remote control.

98, 102

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into

the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

The remote control

does not learn new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries. 5

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 93

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible. —

Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for

the new functions.

112 En

Troubleshooting

■iPod

In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection of your

iPod (page 23).

■Bluetooth

Note

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod. —

Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

This unit supports iPod touch, iPod (Click Wheel,

including iPod classic), iPod nano and iPod mini.

—

iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a

Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit, and the

connection between your iPod and this

unit is complete.

Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha

iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11,

sold separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod

are playable.

—

Store some other playable music files on your iPod. —

Status message Cause Remedy See

page

Searching... The Bluetooth receiver and the Bluetooth

component is in the middle of the pairing.

The Bluetooth receiver and the Bluetooth

component is in the middle of

establishing the connection.

Completed The pairing is completed.

Canceled The pairing is canceled.

BT connected The connection between the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such

as YBA-10, sold separately) and the

Bluetooth component is established.

Disconnected The Bluetooth component is

disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10,

sold separately).

No BT receiver The Bluetooth receiver is not connected

to the DOCK terminal.

Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the

DOCK terminal.

113 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

■AUTO SETUP

Before AUTO SETUP

During AUTO SETUP

Error message Cause Remedy See

page

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. —

Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 84

Error message Cause Remedy See

page

E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 13

E-2:NO SUR. SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 13

E-3:NO PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 13

E-4:SBR.SBL Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

Connect the surround back speaker to the

SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker

terminal if you only have one surround

back speaker.

E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet

environment.

—

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners or move them away from the

optimizer microphone.

—

E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

Connect surround speakers when you use

surround back speakers.

E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect

test tones.

Check the microphone setting. 30

Check the speaker connections and

placement.

The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER

MIC jack may be defective. Contact the

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center.

—

E-9:USER CANCEL The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was

cancelled due to user activity.

Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 30

E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “AUTO SETUP” again. 30

114 En

Troubleshooting

After AUTO SETUP

• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.

• If warning message “W-2” or “W-3” appears, the adjustments are made, however the adjustment may not be optimal.

• Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.

• If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.

Warning message Cause Remedy See

page

W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This

message may appear depending on the

speakers even when the speakers are

connected correctly.

Check the speaker connections for proper

polarity (+ or –).

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker closer to the listening

position.

—

W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive.

Readjust the speaker installation so that all

speakers are set in locations with similar

conditions.

—

Check the speaker connections. 13

Use speakers of similar quality. —

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 30

Notes

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

115 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.

• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.

To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press AMASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position.

1Press AMASTER ON/OFF on the front

panel to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

2Press and hold OSTRAIGHT and then

press AMASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON

position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”

appears in the front panel display.

3Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select

“INITIALIZE”.

4Press OSTRAIGHT repeatedly to select

“ALL”.

Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure

without making any changes.

5Press AMASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to confirm your

selection and turn off this unit.

Resetting the system

Notes

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

While holding

down

INITIALIZE

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

ALL

GLOSSARY

116 En

■Audio and video synchronization

(lip sync)

Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical

term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining

audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and

transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires

complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an

automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices

to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately

without user interaction.

■Bi-amplification connection

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.

One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker

while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter

section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a

restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each

amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely

to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the

speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass

filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a

cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency.

Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff.

■Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is

separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR

signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more

faithfully with this system because each of these signals is

independent. The component signal is also called the “color

difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted

from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is

required in order to output component signals.

■Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal is

composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color,

brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a

video component transmits these three elements combined.

■Deep Color

Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays,

up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI

specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other

displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and

eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions

and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio

can represent many times more shades of gray between black and

white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors

within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YcbCr color space.

■Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you

completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front

channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels,

Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an

additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low

Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is

counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the

surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum

volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise

sound orientation generated using digital sound processing

provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-

channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from

5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that

derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording.

For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie

sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and

“fly-around” effects.

■Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed

for high-definition programming and media including HD

broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory

audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for

Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with

discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps,

Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels

simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for

the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,

Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby

Digital.

■Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast

numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new

technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left

and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right

channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro

Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and

“Game mode” for game sources.

■Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-

channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There

are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,

“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only)

and “Game mode” for game sources.

Glossary

117 En

Glossary

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

■Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to

reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and

right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural),

and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The

surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency

range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The

Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital

signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume

on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and

directionality.

■Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD

DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard

for HD DVD and as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,

this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the

studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up

to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc

players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby TrueHD

also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel

audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby

Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range

control.

■DSD

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on

digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD,

signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency

sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and

oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence

with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high

sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that

offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.

■DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for

multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-

compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz

sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24”

refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion

video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on

DVD video.

■DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and

is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the

world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you

can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left

and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1

(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit

incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel

reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing

5.1-channel format.

■DTS Express

DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the optional

feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which offers high-quality,

low bit rate audio optimized for network streaming, and Internet

applications. DTS Express is used for the Secondary Audio

feature of Blu-ray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD.

These features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the

additional commentaries made by the director of a film) on

demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express signals are

mixed down with the main audio stream on the player

component, and the component sends the mixed audio stream to

the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital coaxial, digital optical, or

analog connections.

■DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution audio

technology developed for high-definition disc-based media

including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional

audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this

technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from

the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.

Supporting bitrates up to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps

for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up

to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.

Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc

players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD High

Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing

multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital

Surround.

■DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology

developed for high-definition disc-based media including HD

DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory audio standard

for both HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers

sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a

high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to

18.0 Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,

DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of

24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version

1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/

amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains

fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.

■HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video

interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a

set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a

digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-

definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a

single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and

supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital

Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video

interface that meets the security requirements of content

providers and system operators. For further information on

HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

118 En

Glossary

■LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency

range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is

counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range

compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels

in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel

playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the

full-range channels with higher separation just like digital

discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

■Neural-THX Surround

“Neural-THX®” Surround is taking surround sound to the next

level. This revolutionary new technology delivers the rich

envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a

format that is fully compatible with stereo. Neural-THX Surround

reduces the bandwidth needed for broadcasters to deliver true,

multi-channel surround presentations, and enables 7.1-channel

support for gaming and movies. By unmasking the audio details,

typically lost by other playback systems, audiences will

experience the deep ambience and subtle details of movies, music

and games. And with this technology being used by sound

designers during content creation, as well as embedded into

playback devices, Neural-THX Surround promises a listening

experience that is true to the original mix. Neural-THX Surround

has been chosen as the official surround sound broadcast format

for XM Satellite Radio’s “XM HD Surround”, as well as other

leading FM/HD radio stations worldwide. For additional

information, please visit http://www.neuralsurround.com/.

■PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio

signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any

compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and

DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the

size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for

“Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses

and then modulated for recording.

■Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the

signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency,

while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into

a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range

of rates that can be played back is determined based on the

sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound

level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In

principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range

of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number

of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■SRS CS II (SRS Circle Surround II™)

SRS CS II (SRS Circle Surround II) is a high-performance

6.1 channel matrix surround sound decoding system. It is the

next-generation of the original SRS Circle Surround technology,

incorporating powerful industry-first features including the dialog

clarity enhancement technology and added cinema-like bass to

the front channels and subwoofer.

■S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y

signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance

through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images.

■“x.v.Color”

A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a

more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression

of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining

compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color”

expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural

images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer

graphics.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION

119 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

■Elements of a sound field

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable

us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

There are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field in addition to the

direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s

instrument.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberations taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any

size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is

exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field

processor.

■CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for

acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual

experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your

own home by using the Yamaha original sound field

technology combined with various digital audio systems.

■CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the

information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate

height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate

and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening

room.

■SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound field so that

accurate representations of all the sound field programs

can be enjoyed on headphones.

■Virtual CINEMA DSP

Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm

that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects

even without any surround speakers by using virtual

surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual

CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that

does not include a center speaker.

■Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit

enhances your listening experience by regenerating the

missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,

flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency

fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-

frequency bass is compensated, providing improved

performance of the overall sound system.

Sound field program information

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

120 En

This unit employs Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic

Optimizer (YPAO) technology to optimize the frequency

characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your

listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the

following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor)

to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency

characteristics.

■Frequency

This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave

increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.

■Gain

This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB

between –20 and +6 dB.

■Q factor

The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as

the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the

values 0.5 and 10.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your

listening requirements using a combination of the above

three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each

equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit

has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.

The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise

adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).

This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as

in Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 2

Parametric equalizer information

Gain

Frequency

Original frequency

characteristic

Band 1

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Gain

Frequency

Band 1

Band 2

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Original frequency

characteristic

SPECIFICATIONS

121 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 130 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 160/195/255/335 W

• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)

[Asia, General, China and Korea models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 175 W

• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 180 W

• Dynamic Headroom

[U.S.A., Canada, General, Asia, China, Korea, and Australia

models]

8 Ω ...................................................................................... 0.9 dB

• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 130 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

1 kHz, 8 Ω .................................................................. 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Voltage

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more

• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance

OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω

PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct .......... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to OUT (REC)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less

CD, etc. to Front L/R

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R

[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .................... 81 dB or more

[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more

CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more

CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened)

to Front L/R .............................................. 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer)

BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 3.5 kHz

• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 450 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 2.0 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) .......... 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Format (Gray Back)

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC

[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL

• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)

• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)

.................................................................................... 60 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Component (Video Conversion Off)

............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)

Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB

• Frequency Response

Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

Specifications

122 En

Specifications

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General and Asia models]

....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA

[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W

• Standby Power Consumption

[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less

[Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less

• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]

6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W

•AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

[Asia, General and China models] ....... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)

[U.K. model] ...................................... 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum)

[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm

(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 17-1/4 in)

• Weight ......................................................... 17.1 kg (37 lbs. 11 oz.)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Lif

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is

often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

SET MENU TREE

123 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

SET MENU tree

AUTO SETUP

MANUAL

SETUP

SPEAKER

VOLUME

SOUND

VIDEO

INPUT

EQ TYPE

GEQ EDIT *1

PEQ SELECT *1

SPEAKER

HEADPHONE

SPEAKER

HEADPHONE

HDMI AUTO

AUTO DELAY

MANUAL DELAY

TONE BYPASS

HDMI AUDIO

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

BGV

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

BGV

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

BGV

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

BGV

INPUT CH

FRONT *5

Press EMENU on the remote control

CONFIG

LEVEL

DISTANCE

TEST TONE

ADAPTIVE DRC

ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL

MUTING TYPE

MAX VOL.

INIT. VOL.

EQUALIZER

LFE LEVEL

DYNAMIC

RANGE

LIPSYNC

AUDIO SET

PURE DIRECT

VIDEO CONV.

COMPONENT I/P *2

HDMI RES. *2

HDMI ASPECT *3

SIRIUS *4

XM *4

TUNER

MULTI CH

LFE/BASS OUT

FRONT SP

CENTER SP

SUR. L/R SP

SUR.B L/R SP

PRESENCE SP

CROSS OVER

SUBWOOFER PHASE

124 En

SET MENU tree

*1Available depending on the parameter selected in “EQ TYPE”.

*2Available when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON”.

*3Available when “HDMI RES.” is not set to “THRGH”.

*4U.S.A. and Canada models only.

*5Available when “INPUT CH” is set to “8ch”.

*6Available when a digital audio input jack is assigned in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”.

*7Available when “VOLUME” is not set to “FIX”.

Notes

OPTION

LOAD

SAVE

AUDIO

VIDEO

PHONO

MD/CD-R

BD/HD DVD

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVR

VCR

V-AU X

DOCK

BLUETOOTH

DISPLAY SET

MEMORY GUARD

INIT. CONFIG

ZONE SET

I/O ASSIGNMENT

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

DECODER MODE *6

BGV

I/O ASSIGNMENT

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

DECODER MODE *6

I/O ASSIGNMENT

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

DECODER MODE

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

STANDBY CHARGE

INPUT RENAME

VOL. TRIM

BGV

START PAIRING

DIMMER

OSD SHIFT

GRAY BACK

SHORT MESSAGE

ON SCREEN

FL SCROLL

AUDIO SELECT

DECODER MODE

EXTD SUR.

ZONE/ZONE3

AMP

VOLUME

MAX VOL. *7

INIT. VOL. *7

COAXIAL IN

OPTICAL IN

OPTICAL OUT

COMPONENT IN

COAXIAL IN

OPTICAL IN

OPTICAL OUT

HDMI IN

COMPONENT IN

COAXIAL IN

OPTICAL OUT

HDMI IN

SYSTEM

MEMORY

SIGNAL

INFO

125 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

■Numerics

1 SPEAKER MENU,

MANUAL SETUP .......................... 75

2 VOLUME MENU,

MANUAL SETUP .......................... 77

2ch Stereo, sound field program .......... 44

3 SOUND MENU,

MANUAL SETUP .......................... 78

3D indicator ......................................... 27

4 VIDEO MENU,

MANUAL SETUP .......................... 80

5 INPUT MENU,

MANUAL SETUP .......................... 81

5.1-channel speaker connection ........... 14

5.1-channel speaker layout .................. 11

6 OPTION MENU,

MANUAL SETUP .......................... 83

6.1-channel speaker connection ........... 14

6.1-channel speaker layout .................. 11

7.1-channel speaker connection ........... 13

7.1-channel speaker layout .................. 11

7ch Enhancer, sound field program ..... 44

7ch Stereo, sound field program .......... 44

■A

A)CONFIG, SPEAKER MENU .......... 75

A)DISPLAY SET, OPTION MENU ... 83

A)EQUALIZER, SOUND MENU ...... 78

AC OUTLET(S) .................................. 25

AC power cable connection ................. 25

Action Game, sound field program ...... 42

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio

subscription ...................................... 58

Activating XM Satellite Radio ............ 53

ADAPTIVE DRC indicator ................. 27

ADAPTIVE DRC,

VOLUME MENU ........................... 77

ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL,

VOLUME MENU ........................... 77

Adaptive DSP level,

VOLUME MENU ........................... 77

Adaptive dynamic range control,

VOLUME MENU ........................... 77

Advanced setup .................................. 102

Advanced sound configurations ........... 66

Adventure, sound field program .......... 43

All Channel Search mode,

SIRIUS tuning ................................. 59

All Channel Search mode,

XM tuning ........................................ 53

AM antenna connection ....................... 24

AM tuner, troubleshooting ................. 108

AM tuning ............................................ 47

AM tuning operation ............................ 47

AMP, operation mode selector ............ 29

AMP, zone set ...................................... 85

ANALOG RES.,

input source information .................. 37

ANTENNA terminals .......................... 10

Audio and video synchronization,

SOUND MENU ...............................79

Audio input BGV, INPUT MENU .......82

Audio input jack selection ....................36

AUDIO jacks ........................................16

Audio jacks ...........................................16

AUDIO SELECT .................................36

AUDIO SELECT,

initial configuration .......................... 84

Audio select, initial configuration ........84

Audio settings, SOUND MENU ..........80

Audio signal flow .................................18

Audio signals, HDMI ...........................17

AUTO DELAY, lip sync ......................79

Auto delay, lip sync ..............................79

AUTO SETUP .....................................30

AUTO SETUP, message ....................113

Automatic setup ...................................30

Automatic station preset,

FM/AM tuning .................................48

■B

B)LEVEL, SPEAKER MENU .............76

B)LFE LEVEL, SOUND MENU ........79

B)MEMORY GUARD,

OPTION MENU ..............................84

Banana plug ..........................................15

Bass cross over,

speaker configurations .....................76

BGV, INPUT MENU ...........................82

BI-AMP, advanced setup ...................103

Bi-amplification connections ...............15

Bi-amplifier mode, advanced setup ....103

BITRATE, input source information ...37

Bluetooth component playback ............65

Bluetooth receiver connection ..............23

Bluetooth, troubleshooting .................112

Blu-ray Disc player connection ............21

■C

C)DISTANCE, SPEAKER MENU .....76

C)DYNAMIC RANGE,

SOUND MENU ...............................79

C)INIT. CONFIG, OPTION MENU ...84

C.IMAGE, decoder parameter .............73

Category Search mode,

SIRIUS tuning ..................................59

Category Search mode, XM tuning ......54

CD player connection ...........................22

CD recorder connection .......................22

Cellar Club, sound field program .........41

CENTER jack .......................................23

CENTER PRE OUT jack .....................22

CENTER SP, speaker configurations ..75

Center speaker ...................................... 12

Center speaker,

speaker configurations .....................75

CENTER WIDTH,

decoder parameter ............................73

Chamber, sound field program .............41

CHANNEL,

input source information ................. 37

Charge on standby, INPUT MENU ..... 82

Church in Freiburg,

sound field program ........................ 41

CINEMA DSP 3D mode ..................... 45

CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 27

CLASSICAL, sound field program ..... 40

Clearing configurations,

remote control ................................. 97

Clearing preset channels,

SIRIUS tuning ................................. 60

Clearing preset channels, XM tuning .. 55

Clearing preset stations,

FM/AM tuning ................................ 49

COAXIAL jacks .................................. 16

COMPONENT I/P, VIDEO MENU ... 80

Component interlace/progressive

up-conversion, VIDEO MENU ....... 80

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .............. 16

Compressed Music Enhancer mode .... 44

Connecting AC power cable ................ 25

Connecting AM antenna ...................... 24

Connecting Bluetooth receiver ............ 23

Connecting Blu-ray Disc player .......... 21

Connecting CD player ......................... 22

Connecting CD recorder ...................... 22

Connecting DVD player ...................... 21

Connecting DVD recorder ................... 21

Connecting external amplifier ............. 22

Connecting FM antenna ...................... 24

Connecting HD DVD player ............... 21

Connecting iPod universal dock .......... 23

Connecting MD recorder ..................... 22

Connecting power cable ...................... 25

Connecting projector ........................... 19

Connecting set-top box ........................ 21

Connecting SiriusConnect tuner .......... 57

Connecting speaker cable .................... 15

Connecting speakers ............................ 13

Connecting turntable ........................... 22

Connecting TV monitor ....................... 19

Connecting VCR ................................. 22

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner

Home Dock ..................................... 52

Connecting YBA-10 ............................ 23

Connecting YDS-11 ............................ 23

Connecting Zone 2/3 components ....... 99

Connections ......................................... 10

Controlling other components ............. 90

Controlling Zone 2/3 ......................... 100

CROSS OVER,

speaker configurations ..................... 76

CSII Cinema ........................................ 66

CSII indicator ...................................... 27

CSII Music ........................................... 66

CT LEVEL, sound field parameter ..... 71

Index

126 En

■D

D)LIPSYNC, SOUND MENU ............ 79

D)TEST TONE, SPEAKER MENU ... 77

D)ZONE SET, OPTION MENU ......... 85

Decoder descriptions ............................ 66

Decoder indicators ............................... 27

DECODER MODE,

initial configuration ......................... 84

Decoder mode, initial configuration .... 84

DECODER MODE, INPUT MENU ... 82

Decoder mode, INPUT MENU ........... 82

Decoder parameter ............................... 73

Decoder selection ................................. 66

DIALOG LIFT,

sound field parameter ...................... 68

DIALOG, input source information ..... 37

DIGITAL INPUT jacks ....................... 10

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks ................... 10

DIMENSION, decoder parameter ....... 73

DIMMER, Display settings ................. 83

Dimmer, Display settings .................... 83

Direct frequency tuning,

FM/AM tuning ................................. 47

Direct number access mode,

SIRIUS tuning ................................. 59

Direct number access mode,

XM tuning ....................................... 54

DIRECT, sound field parameter .......... 71

Display settings, OPTION MENU ...... 83

Display window, remote control .......... 28

Displaying HD Radio information ....... 51

Displaying input source information ... 37

Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information ...................................... 62

Displaying XM Satellite Radio

information ...................................... 56

DIST, automatic setup ......................... 31

Drama, sound field program ................ 43

DSP indicators ..................................... 27

DSP LEVEL, sound field parameter .... 68

DVD player connection ....................... 21

DVD recorder connection .................... 21

Dynamic range, SOUND MENU ........ 79

■E

E)AUDIO SET, SOUND MENU ........ 80

EFFECT LEVELL,

sound field parameter ...................... 72

Effect sound level,

sound field parameter ...................... 68

ENHANCER indicator ........................ 27

ENHANCER, sound field program ..... 44

ENTERTAIN, sound field program ..... 42

Equalizer type select, equalizer ........... 78

Equalizer, SOUND MENU .................. 78

EXTD SUR., initial configuration ....... 85

Extended surround,

initial configuration ......................... 85

External amplifier connection .............. 22

■F

F)PURE DIRECT, Audio settings ....... 80

FL SCROLL, Display settings ............. 84

FLAG, input source information ......... 37

FM antenna connection ........................24

FM tuner, troubleshooting .................. 108

FM tuning ............................................. 47

FM tuning operation .............................47

FOCUS, decoder parameter ................. 73

FORMAT, input source information ...37

FRONT L/R jacks ................................23

Front left and right channels input jack,

INPUT MENU ................................. 83

Front left/right speaker ......................... 12

Front panel display scroll,

Display settings ................................ 84

Front panel door ...................................29

FRONT PRE OUT jacks ......................22

FRONT SP, speaker configurations ..... 75

Front speakers,

speaker configurations .....................75

FRONT, INPUT MENU ...................... 83

■G

GEQ EDIT, equalizer ........................... 78

Graphic equalizer edit, equalizer ..........78

Gray back, Display settings .................83

GRAY BACK, Display settings,

Display settings ................................ 83

■H

Hall in Amsterdam,

sound field program ......................... 41

Hall in Munich, sound field program ... 40

Hall in Vienna, sound field program ....40

HD DVD player connection ................. 21

HD Radio ............................................. 50

HD Radio audio program selection ......50

HD Radio information display ............. 51

HD Radio, troubleshooting ................ 108

HDMI aspect ratio, VIDEO MENU ....81

HDMI ASPECT, VIDEO MENU ........81

HDMI AUDIO, Audio settings ............ 80

HDMI audio, Audio settings ................ 80

HDMI cable plug .................................17

HDMI error message ............................ 37

HDMI information ...............................17

HDMI jack ........................................... 17

HDMI monitor check,

advanced setup ............................... 103

HDMI RES.,

input source information .................. 37

HDMI RES., VIDEO MENU ..............81

HDMI resolution, VIDEO MENU .......81

HDMI signal ........................................ 17

HDMI SIGNAL,

input source information .................. 37

HDMI, troubleshooting ......................108

HEADPHONE, dynamic range ............79

Headphones indicator ........................... 27

Headphones use ....................................36

Headphones, dynamic range ................79

■I

I/O ASSIGNMENT, INPUT MENU ... 82

ID1/ID2 indicator .................................28

Information display ..............................28

Infrared window, remote control ......... 28

INIT. VOL., zone set ............................85

INIT.DLY, sound field parameter ........69

Initial configuration,

OPTION MENU ..............................84

INITIALIZE, advanced setup .............103

INPUT CH, INPUT MENU .................83

Input channel indicators .......................28

Input channels, INPUT MENU ............83

INPUT RENAME, INPUT MENU ......82

Input rename, INPUT MENU ..............82

Input signal indicators ..........................27

Input source indicators .........................27

Input source information display ..........37

Input/output assignment,

INPUT MENU .................................82

iPod control ..........................................63

iPod playback .......................................63

iPod universal dock connection ............23

iPod, troubleshooting ..........................112

■L

LFE/BASS OUT,

speaker configurations .....................75

LFE/bass out, speaker configurations ..75

Lip sync, SOUND MENU ....................79

LIVE/CLUB, sound field program .......41

LIVENESS, sound field parameter ......70

Loading system settings .......................87

Low-frequency effect level,

SOUND MENU ...............................79

LVL, automatic setup ...........................31

■M

Macro programming, remote control ...95

MANUAL DELAY, lip sync ...............79

Manual delay, lip sync ..........................79

MANUAL SETUP ...............................74

MANUAL SETUP operation ...............74

Manual station preset,

FM/AM tuning .................................48

MAX VOL., VOLUME MENU ...........78

MAX VOL., zone set ...........................85

Maximum volume,

VOLUME MENU ............................78

MD recorder connection .......................22

Memory guard, OPTION MENU .........84

Menu browse mode control,

iPod playback ...................................63

Menu browsing indicator ......................28

MONITOR CHECK,

advanced setup ...............................103

Mono Movie, sound field program .......43

MOVIE, sound field program ..............43

MULTI CH INPUT jacks .....................10

Multi-channel input component

selection ............................................36

Multi-channel sources with

headphones .......................................44

Multi-zone configuration ......................99

Music Video, sound field program .......42

Muting audio output .............................37

MUTING TYPE, VOLUME MENU ...78

Muting type, VOLUME MENU ..........78

Index

127 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION English

■N

Neo:6 Cinema ...................................... 66

Neo:6 Music ......................................... 66

neural indicator .................................... 27

NRL-THX ............................................ 66

NRL-THX Music ................................. 66

Number of speakers, automatic setup .. 31

■O

ON SCREEN, Display settings ............ 84

On-screen display time,

Display settings ................................ 84

Operation mode selector ...................... 29

OPTICAL jacks ................................... 16

Optimizing speaker setting .................. 30

OSD SHIFT, Display settings .............. 83

OSD shift, Display settings .................. 83

■P

P.INIT.DLY, sound field parameter .... 69

Pairing with Bluetooth component ...... 65

PANORAMA, decoder parameter ....... 73

Parameter initialization,

advanced setup ............................... 103

Parametric equalizer information ....... 120

Parametric equalizer select, equalizer .. 79

Parental Lock, SIRIUS tuning ............. 61

PEQ SELECT, equalizer ...................... 79

PHONES jack ...................................... 36

PL LEVEL, sound field parameter ...... 71

Placing speakers ................................... 11

PLII Game ............................................ 66

PLII Movie ........................................... 66

PLII Music ........................................... 66

PLIIx Game .......................................... 66

PLIIx Movie ......................................... 66

PLIIx Music ......................................... 66

Power cable connection ....................... 25

PR LEVEL, sound field parameter ...... 71

PRE OUT jacks .................................... 10

Presence left/right speaker ................... 12

PRESENCE SP,

speaker configurations ..................... 76

Presence speaker indicators ................. 28

Presence speakers,

speaker configurations ..................... 76

Preset channel clear, SIRIUS tuning .... 60

Preset channel clear, XM tuning .......... 55

Preset channel setting,

SIRIUS tuning ................................. 60

Preset channel setting, XM tuning ....... 55

PRESET indicator ................................ 27

Preset Search mode, SIRIUS tuning .... 59

Preset Search mode, XM tuning .......... 54

Preset stations, FM/AM tuner .............. 48

Pro Logic .............................................. 66

Programming other remote controls .... 93

Projector connection ............................ 19

Pure Direct mode ................................. 46

Pure direct, Audio settings ................... 80

Pure hi-fi sound listening ..................... 46

■R

Rear panel .............................................10

Recalling a preset station,

FM/AM tuning .................................49

Recital/Opera, sound field program .....42

REMOTE CON AMP,

advanced setup ...............................102

Remote control .....................................89

Remote control code setting .................91

Remote control ID setting,

advanced setup ...............................102

Remote control use ...............................28

Remote control, installing batteries ........5

Remote control, troubleshooting ........111

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks ......................23

REMOTE SENSOR,

advanced setup ...............................102

Remote sensor, advanced setup ..........102

Repeat, iPod playback ..........................64

Resetting system .................................115

REV.DELAY, sound field parameter ..71

REV.LEVEL, sound field parameter ...71

REV.TIMES, sound field parameter ....70

Roleplaying Game,

sound field program .........................42

ROOM SIZE, sound field parameter ...69

RS-232C STANDBY,

advanced setup ...............................102

■S

S VIDEO jacks .....................................16

S.INIT.DLY, sound field parameter ....69

S.LIVENESS, sound field parameter ...70

S.ROOM SIZE,

sound field parameter ....................... 69

SAMPLING,

input source information ..................37

Saving system settings .........................86

SB INIT.DLY, sound field parameter ..69

SB LEVELSL LEVEL .........................71

SB LIVENESS,

sound field parameter ....................... 70

SB ROOM SIZE,

sound field parameter ....................... 69

Sci-Fi, sound field program ..................43

Selecting audio input jacks ...................36

Selecting HD Radio audio programs ....50

Selecting multi-channel input

component ........................................36

Selecting sound field programs ............39

SET MENU tree .................................123

Setting preset channels,

SIRIUS tuning ..................................60

Setting preset channels, XM tuning .....55

Setting remote control ID,

remote control ID setting ...............102

Setting zone, zone set ...........................85

Set-top box connection .........................21

Short message display ..........................84

SHORT MESSAGE,

Display settings ................................84

Shuffle, iPod playback .........................64

Signal flow ...........................................18

SIGNAL INFO .....................................37

SILENT CINEMA ............................... 44

SILENT CINEMA indicator ............... 27

Simple remote mode control,

iPod playback .................................. 63

Simplified remote control .................... 98

Sirius ID diaplay .................................. 58

SIRIUS PIN, advanced setup ............ 103

SIRIUS Satellite Radio information

display ............................................. 62

SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations ...... 58

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Parental Lock

code number reset,

advanced setup .............................. 103

SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription

activation ......................................... 58

SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ............. 57

SIRIUS Satellite Radio,

troubleshooting .............................. 110

SiriusConnect tuner connection ........... 57

SL LEVEL, sound field parameter ...... 71

SLEEP indicator .................................. 28

Sleep timer ........................................... 38

Sound field parameter .......................... 69

Sound field parameter settings ............ 67

Sound field program information ...... 119

Sound field program selection ............. 39

Sound field programs .......................... 39

Sound field programs with

headphones ...................................... 44

Sound field programs without

surround speakers ............................ 44

Source name change ............................ 94

SOURCE, operation mode selector ..... 29

SP, automatic setup ............................. 31

SP2 speaker terminals .......................... 15

Speaker cable connection .................... 15

Speaker configurations,

SPEAKER MENU .......................... 75

Speaker connection .............................. 13

Speaker distance, automatic setup ....... 31

Speaker distance, SPEAKER MENU .. 76

SPEAKER IMP., advanced setup ...... 102

Speaker impedance setting .................. 26

Speaker impedance,

advanced setup .............................. 102

Speaker level adjustment ..................... 46

Speaker level, automatic setup ............ 31

Speaker level, SPEAKER MENU ....... 76

Speaker placement ............................... 11

Speaker setting optimization ............... 30

Speaker terminals ................................ 10

SPEAKER, dynamic range .................. 79

Speakers, dynamic range ..................... 79

Specifications .................................... 121

Spectacle, sound field program ........... 43

Sports, sound field program ................ 42

SR LEVEL, sound field parameter ...... 71

Standard, sound field program ............ 43

STANDBY CHARGE,

INPUT MENU ................................ 82

Standby mode ...................................... 26

START PAIRING, INPUT MENU ..... 82

Start pairing, INPUT MENU ............... 82

Stereo playback ................................... 44

Index

128 En

STEREO, sound field program ............ 44

Straight Enhancer,

sound field program ......................... 44

STRAIGHT mode ................................ 45

Subwoofer ............................................ 12

SUBWOOFER jack ............................. 23

SUBWOOFER PHASE,

speaker configurations ..................... 76

Subwoofer phase,

speaker configurations ..................... 76

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ............ 23

Supplied accessories .............................. 3

SUR, sound field parameter ................. 72

SUR. DECODE,

sound field program ......................... 44

SUR. L/R SP, speaker configurations .. 75

SUR.B L/R SP,

speaker configurations ..................... 76

SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT

jacks ................................................. 23

Surround back left/right speaker .......... 12

Surround back left/right speakers,

speaker configurations ..................... 76

Surround back speaker ......................... 12

Surround Decode,

sound field program ......................... 44

Surround decoder mode ....................... 44

SURROUND L/R jacks ....................... 23

Surround left/right speaker .................. 12

Surround left/right speakers,

speaker configurations ..................... 75

SURROUND PRE OUT jacks ............. 22

SYSTEM MEMORY ........................... 86

System settings .................................... 86

■T

Test tone, SPEAKER MENU .............. 77

The Bottom Line,

sound field program ......................... 41

The Roxy Theatre,

sound field program ......................... 41

Tonal quality adjustment ..................... 46

TONE BYPASS, Audio settings ......... 80

Tone bypass, Audio settings ................ 80

Transmit indicator ................................ 28

Troubleshooting ................................. 104

TruBass, decoder parameter ................ 73

Tuner frequency step,

advanced setup ............................... 103

TUNER FRQ STEP,

advanced setup ............................... 103

Tuner indicators ................................... 27

Turning off ........................................... 26

Turning on ............................................ 26

Turntable connection ........................... 22

TV control, remote control .................. 89

TV monitor connection ........................ 19

TV, operation mode selector ................ 29

■U

Unit for the speaker distance

adjustment ........................................ 76

UNIT, speaker distance ........................ 76

Unprocessed input source listening ..... 45

■V

VCR connection ...................................22

Vertical dialogue position,

sound field parameter ....................... 68

VIDEO AUX jacks .............................. 24

VIDEO CONV., VIDEO MENU .........80

Video conversion, VIDEO MENU ...... 80

VIDEO jacks ........................................16

Video jacks ...........................................16

Video signal flow ................................. 18

Video signals, HDMI ........................... 17

Village Vanguard,

sound field program ......................... 41

Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................44

VIRTUAL indicator ............................. 27

VOL. TRIM, INPUT MENU ............... 82

VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................5

VOLUME level indicator .....................28

Volume trim, INPUT MENU ...............82

VOLUME, zone set .............................. 85

■W

Wake on RS-232C access,

advanced setup ............................... 102

Warehouse Loft,

sound field program ......................... 41

WRENCH HOLDER ........................... 15

■X

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

connection ........................................ 52

XM Satellite Radio activation .............. 53

XM Satellite Radio information

display ..............................................56

XM Satellite Radio operations .............53

XM Satellite Radio tuning ................... 52

XM Satellite Radio,

troubleshooting .............................. 109

■Y

YBA-10 connection .............................23

YDS-11 connection .............................. 23

YPAO ................................................... 30

YPAO indicator .................................... 27

■Z

Zone 2/3 component connection ..........99

Zone 2/3 control ................................. 100

Zone 2/Zone 3 amplifier, zone set .......85

Zone 2/Zone 3 initial volume,

zone set ............................................85

Zone 2/Zone 3 maximum volume,

zone set ............................................85

Zone 2/Zone 3 volume, zone set ..........85

Zone indicators .....................................28

ZONE OUT jacks ................................. 10

Zone set, OPTION MENU ...................85

ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators ..................28

“AMASTER ON/OFF” or

“3DVD” (example) indicates the

name of the parts on the front panel

or the remote control. Refer to the

attached sheet or the pages at the

end of this manual for the

information about each position of

the parts.

■Front panel

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUM E

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROLSELECT

AUDI O TON E

ENTER

ON/OFF

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROLSELECT

AUDIO TONE

ENTER

CBMA

PNO

LKIGFEDHJ

APPENDIX

■Remote control

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

MEMORY

RETURN

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

3D DSP

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

Q R

iii

Sound output in each sound field program

*1 / / / : OFF

*2 / / / : ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input.

Front left speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker

Center speaker Surround right speaker Presence left speaker

Front right speaker Surround back left speaker Presence right speaker

Speaker from which sound is being output Speaker from which no sound is being output

LSL

SBR

CSR PL

SBL

Speaker settings

7-channel 5-channel

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

Speaker settings

7-channel 5-channel

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

SBRSBL

SL SR

PL x

neural

PL x

neural

Program 3D

Input audio source

2-channel

(monaural) 2-channel (stereo) 5.1-channel*16.1/7.1-channel*2

CLASSICAL

Hall in Munich

Hall in Vienna

Hall in Amsterdam

Church in Freiburg

Chamber

LIVE/CLUB

Village Vanguard

Warehouse Loft

Cellar Club

The Roxy Theatre

The Bottom Line

ON 1122

OFF

1124

APPENDIX

ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

Action Game

Roleplaying Game

Music Video

Recital/Opera

MOVIE

Standard

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

Drama

ON 2222

OFF

7424

MOVIE

Mono Movie

ON 2222

OFF 3224

STEREO

2ch Stereo

–– 5555

STEREO

7ch Stereo

MUSIC ENHANCER

7ch Enhancer

––

4444

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(Pro Logic)

(PLII Movie)

(PLII Game)

––

6774

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(PLII Music)

–– 8774

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(PLIIx Movie)

(PLIIx Game)

(Neo:6 Cinema)

(CSII Cinema)

(NRL-THX)

––

6474

SUR.DECODE

Surround Decoder

(PLIIx Music)

(Neo:6 Music)

(CSII Music)

(NRL-THX Music)

––

8474

STRAIGHT

Pure Direct

MUSIC ENHANCER

Straight Enhancer

––

5574

Program 3D

Input audio source

2-channel

(monaural) 2-channel (stereo) 5.1-channel*16.1/7.1-channel*2

List of remote control codes

ACURA 00101

ADDISON 01201, 01601,

08401

ADMIRAL 01301, 02201,

05801

ADVENT 09601

AGB 06801

AIKO 01201

AKAI 00101, 00301,

02901, 04601,

06801, 08901,

10501

AKURA 03701

ALBA 00101, 00401,

04801, 08501

AMERICA ACTION

02701

AMPRO 09401

AMSTRAD 00101, 00401,

02501, 04801,

05101, 05301,

06801

ANAM 00101, 02701,

03401

ANAM NATIONAL

03401, 08301

ANITECH 00101

AOC 00101, 00301,

00901, 01201,

01301, 01601,

02601, 02701,

05601

APEX DIGITAL09301, 09701,

09901

ASA 01401

AUDIOSONIC 00401, 01701

AWA 00101

BANG & OLUFSEN

07201

BASIC 00101

BAUR 00401, 04601,

06701

BAYSONIC 02701

BEAUMARK 02601

BEKO 04701, 06201,

09001, 09101

BELL & HOWELL

02001

BEON 00401

BLAUPUNKT 02801

BLUE SKY 08501, 11401

BONDSTEC 03301

BRADFORD 02701

BRANDT 01701, 04201

BROKSONIC 03101, 05801

BUSH 00101, 00101,

00401, 04801,

04901, 08501,

11401

BYDESIGN 14301, 14401,

14501, 14601

CANDLE 00301

CARNIVALE 00301

CARVER 00801, 02401

CASCADE 00101

CATHAY 00401

CCE 00401

CELEBRITY 00001

CELERA 09701

CENTURION 00401

CGE 03301

CHANGHONG 09701

CHING TAI 00101, 01201

CHUN YUN 00001, 00101,

01201, 02701

CHUNG HSIN 00701, 01601,

02701

CIMLINE 00101

CINERAL 01201, 05601

CITIZEN 00301, 00901,

01201

CLARION 02701

CLARIVOX 00401

CLATRONIC 03301, 04701

CONDOR 04101, 04701

CONRAC 10301

CONTEC 00101, 02701

CRAIG 02701

CROSLEY 00801

CROWN 00101, 00401,

02701, 04701,

05201

CTC 03301

CURTIS MATHES

00301, 00501,

00801, 00901,

01301, 01801,

02001, 02301,

05601, 08901,

11801, 12201

CXC 02701

DAEWOO 00101, 00301,

00401, 01201,

01601, 02001,

02401, 02601,

02701, 04901,

05601, 07901,

08201, 13101

DANSAI 00401

DAYTON 00101

DE GRAAF 02901, 06901

DECCA 00401, 06801

DENON 01801

DIGATRON 00401

DIXI 00101, 00401

DUMONT 00201

DWIN 09201, 10101

ECE 00401

ELBE 03501

ELECTROBAND

00001

ELIN 00401, 06901

ELITE 04101

ELTA 00101

EMERSON 02001, 02601,

02701, 03101,

04601, 05801,

07901

ENVISION 00301, 10601

EPSON 11001

ERRES 00401

ETHER 00101, 00301

ETRON 00101

EUROPHON 06801

FERGUSON 00401, 01001,

01701, 03201,

03801, 04201,

07101

FIDELITY 04601

FINLANDIA 02901, 04401

FINLUX 00401, 01401,

01501, 04401,

06801

FIRSTAR 00101, 03101

FIRSTLINE 00101, 03301,

08501

FISHER 01401, 02001,

02901, 04701

FLINT 05701

FORMENTI 00401, 04101

FORTRESS 01301

FRONTECH 02201, 03301,

03701

FUJITSU 08701, 10401

FUNAI 02501, 02701,

03701

FUTURETECH 02701

GATEWAY 13301, 13401

GE 00301, 00501,

00601, 01201,

02601, 02701,

05601, 07101,

11801, 12201,

12601

GEC 00401, 06801

GELOSO 00101

GENEXXA 02201

GIBRALTER 00201, 00301

GOLDSTAR 00301, 00401,

01701, 02001,

02601, 05001

GOODMANS 00401, 04801,

04901, 08201

GOREMJE 04701

GRADIENTE 00701, 02401

GRAETZ 02201, 04601

GRANADA 00401, 02901,

04301, 06801

GRANDIN 07701

GRUNDIG 00401, 02801,

06301, 07001,

07401

GRUNPY 02701

HALLMARK 02601

HANKOOK 00301, 02601,

02701

HANSEATIC 00401, 04101,

04601, 05201,

07001

HANTAREX 06801

HARMAN/KARDON

00801

HARVARD 02701

HAVERMY 01301

HCM 00101, 05101

HELLO KITTY 05601

HINARI 00101, 00401

HISAWA 05701

HITACHI 00101, 00301,

01201, 01501,

01701, 01801,

02201, 02601,

03001, 04501,

06101, 06901,

07301, 11701,

12101

HUA TUN 00101

HUANYU 04901

HYPSON 00401, 03701

ICE 03701, 04801

IMPERIAL 03301, 04701,

05201

INDIANA 00401

INFINITY 00801

INGELEN 02201

INNO HIT 06801

INNOVA 00401

INTEQ 00201

INTERFUNK 00401, 02201,

03301, 04601,

06701

INTERVISION 00401, 03701,

05001

ITS 04801

ITT 02201, 04601,

06901

JBL 00801

JCB 00001

JEAN 00101, 00601,

01201, 02101,

03101

JENSEN 09601

JVC 00701, 04801,

05801, 08401,

08701

KAISUI 00101

KAPSCH 02201

KARCHER 07701

KATHREIN 07001

KEC 02701

KENDO 00401

KENWOOD 00301

KNEISSEL 03501, 05401

KOLIN 00701, 01601,

02701

KORPEL 00401

KOYODA 00101

KTV 00301, 02701

L&S ELECTRONIC

10301

LEYCO 00401, 03701

LG 00301, 00401,

00901, 01601,

02601, 09001

LIESENK & TTER

00401

LOEWE 06701

LUXOR 04501, 04601

LXI 00501, 00801,

02001, 02101,

02601

M ELECTRONIC

00101, 00401,

01401, 01501,

01701, 02201,

03801, 04401,

04901, 06001

MAGNADYNE 03301, 06801

MAGNAFON 06801

MAGNAVOX 00301, 00801,

12001, 12601

MANESTH 03701, 04101

MARANTZ 00301, 00401,

00801, 07001

MARK 00401

MATSUI 00101, 00401,

02901, 04801,

06301, 06801

MATSUSHITA 03401, 08301

MEDIATOR 00401

APPENDIX

MEDION 08501, 10301,

11401

MEGATRON 01801, 02601

MEMOREX 00101, 01901,

02001, 02601,

03401, 05801,

11401

METZ 05501

MGA 00301, 01901,

02601

MICROMAXX 10301

MICROSTAR 10301

MIDLAND 00201, 00501,

00601

MINERVA 06301

MINOKA 05101

MITSUBISHI 00301, 01301,

01601, 01901,

02001, 02601,

02701, 03101,

03401, 06701,

11201, 11901

MIVAR 03901, 04001,

06801, 07601

MOTOROLA 01301

MTC 00301, 00901,

06701

MULTITECH 00101, 02701

MYRYAD 07001

NAD 02101, 02601,

04601, 11301

NEC 00101, 00301,

00601, 02001,

02101, 02401,

02601, 05701,

06501, 13201

NECKERMANN

00401, 07001

NEI 00401

NETSAT 00401

NEWAVE 00101, 01201,

01301, 02601

NIKKAI 00401, 03701

NIKKO 00301, 01201,

02601

NOKIA 04601, 05901,

06001, 06901,

08101

NORCENT 09301, 10801

NORDMENDE 01701, 03801,

07101

NTC 01201

OCEANIC 02201, 04601

ONWA 02701, 05301

OPTIMUS 02001, 02301,

03401, 08301

OPTONICA 01301

ORION 00401, 03101,

04101, 05801,

06801

OSAKI 03701, 05101

OTTO VERSAND

00401, 04101,

06701, 07001

PALLADIUM 04701, 05201

PANAMA 03701

PANASONIC 00401, 00601,

00801, 02201,

03401, 08301,

12401

PATHE CINEMA

03201, 04101

PAUSA 00101

PENNEY 00301, 00501,

00601, 00901,

02101, 02601,

12201

PERDIO 04101

PHILCO 00301, 00401,

00801, 01801,

02601, 02701,

03301, 05801,

13101

PHILIPS 00001, 00301,

00401, 00601,

00801, 01201,

01601, 02601,

04901, 07001,

08801, 12601

PHONOLA 00401

PILOT 00301

PIONEER 01701, 02201,

02301, 03801,

08601, 09501,

11301

PORTLAND 01201

PRANDONI-PRINCE

06801

PRIMA 09601

PRISM 00601

PROFEX 00101, 04601

PROSCAN 00501

PROTECH 00101, 00401,

03301, 03701,

05201, 08501

PROTON 00101, 00301,

02601

PULSAR 00201

QUASAR 00601, 03401,

08301

QUELLE 00401, 01401,

04601, 06701

RADIOLA 00401

RADIOMARELLI

06801

RADIOSHACK 00301, 00501,

02001, 02601,

02701

RCA 00001, 00301,

00501, 01101,

01201, 02601,

08601, 11501,

11801, 13901,

12201, 12501,

12601, 12801

REALISTIC 00301, 02001,

02601, 02701

REDIFFUSION 04601

REOC 09001

REVOX 00401

REX 02201, 03501,

03701

RFT 05201

R-LINE 00401

ROADSTAR 00101, 03701,

05201

RUNCO 00201, 00301,

06501, 07501

SABA 01701, 02201,

03801, 04201

SACCS 03201

SAGEM 07701

SAISHO 00101, 03701,

06801

SALORA 02201, 04601,

06901

SAMBERS 06801

SAMPO 00101, 00301,

01201, 01301,

02001, 02501,

02601, 08301,

13301

SAMSUNG 00101, 00301,

00401, 00901,

01101, 01201,

02001, 02601,

03701, 04701,

07001, 07401,

07801, 08901,

09801, 10501,

10701

SANSEI 05601

SANSUI 05801

SANYO 01401, 02001,

02701, 02901,

04301, 10201

SBR 00401

SCHAUB LORENZ

04601

SCHNEIDER 00401, 03301,

04801, 08501

SCOTCH 02601

SCOTT 02601, 02701,

03101

SEARS 00501, 00801,

02001, 02101,

02501, 02601

SEG 03701, 08501

SEI 06801

SELECO 02201, 03501

SEMIVOX 02701

SEMP 02101

SHARP 00301, 01301,

08301

SHEN YING 00101, 01201

SHENG CHIA 00101, 01301,

03101

SIAREM 06801

SIEMENS 00401, 02801

SINUDYNE 06801

SKANTIC 04501

SKY 00401

SKYGIANT 02701

SKYWORTH 00401

SOLAVOX 02201

SONITRON 02901

SONOKO 00101, 00401

SONOLOR 02201, 02901

SONTEC 00401

SONY 00001, 08301,

11101, 11601,

12701, 12901

SOUNDESIGN 02601, 02701

SOUNDWAVE 00401, 05201

SOWA 00601, 00901,

01201, 02101,

02601

SQUAREVIEW 02501

SSS 02701

STANDARD 00101

STARLITE 02701

STERN 02201, 03501

SUPREME 00001

SYLVANIA 00301, 00801,

02501

SYMPHONIC 02501, 02701

SYNCO 00001, 00901,

01201, 01301,

02601, 05601

SYSLINE 00401

T + A 05501

TACICO 00101, 01201,

02601

TAI YI 00101

TANDY 01301, 02201

TASHIKO 01201, 08301

TATUNG 00101, 00401,

00601, 00801,

00901, 02001,

02101, 06801

TCM 10301

TEAC 00101, 00401,

03701, 05101,

05201, 05701,

08501, 11401

TEC 03301

TECHNEMA 04101

TECHNICS 00601, 03401,

08301

TECHWOOD 00601

TECO 00101, 00601,

01201, 01301,

02601, 03701,

08401

TEKNIKA 00801, 00901,

01201, 01901,

02701

TELEFUNKEN 01701, 03601,

04201, 08001,

08901

TELEMEISTER04101

TELETECH 00101

TENSAI 04101

TERA 00301

THOMSON 01701, 03801,

07101, 08001,

12501

THORN 00401, 01401,

04601, 06701

TMK 02601

TNCI 00201

TOSHIBA 00901, 02001,

02101, 06601,

07801, 08301,

10901, 12101,

12301, 13001,

13201

TRIUMPH 06801

TUNTEX 00101, 00301,

01201

TVS 05801

UHER 04101

UNIVERSUM 00401, 01401,

01501, 03701,

04401, 04701,

06401

VECTOR RESEARCH

00301

VESTEL 00401

VICTOR 00701, 03401,

08301, 08401

VIDEOSAT 03301

VIDIKRON 00801

VIDTECH 02601

VIEWSONIC 13301

VISION 04101

VOXSON 02201

WALTHAM 04501

WARDS 00301, 00801,

02601, 11301

WATSON 00401, 04101

WAYCON 02101

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

00401, 04101,

05801, 07901

vii

YAMAHA 00301, 01801,

08301, 10001,

11001, 13501,

13601, 13701,

13801, 14001,

14101, 14201

YAPSHE 03401

YOKO 00401, 03701

ZENITH 00201, 01201,

02601, 05801

VCR

ADMIRAL 01102

ADVENTURA 00002

AIKO 02102

AIWA 00002, 00402,

02202, 02602,

02702

AKAI 00602, 02302

AKIBA 01402

ALBA 01402, 02102,

02302, 02702

AMERICA ACTION

02102

AMERICAN HIGH

00302

AMSTRAD 00002

ANAM 00402, 01902,

02002, 02102,

02902

ANAM NATIONAL

01902, 04502

ANITECH 01402

ASA 00402, 01502

ASHA 02002

ASUKA 00402

AUDIOVOX 00402, 02102

BAIRD 00002, 00602,

01602

BASIC LINE 01402, 02102

BEAUMARK 02002

BELL & HOWELL

01602

BLAUPUNKT 01902

BRANDT 02402

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

00602

BROKSONIC 01702, 02602,

04402

BUSH 01402, 02102,

02702

CALIX 00402

CANON 00302

CARVER 01502

CCE 01402, 02102

CGE 00002

CIMLINE 01402

CINERAL 02102

CITIZEN 00402, 02102,

04302

COLT 01402

COMBITECH 02702

CRAIG 00402, 01002,

01402, 02002

CROWN 01402, 02102

CURTIS MATHES

00302, 00602,

01202, 03702

CYBERNEX 02002

CYRUS 01502

DAEWOO 00902, 01602,

02102, 03402,

04302

DANSAI 01402

DE GRAAF 00702

DECCA 00002, 01502

DENON 00702

DUAL 00602

DUMONT 00002, 01502,

01602

DYNATECH 00002

ELCATECH 01402

ELECTROHOME

00402

ELECTROPHONIC

00402

EMEREX 00102

EMERSON 00002, 00302,

00402, 00802,

00902, 01702,

02002, 02102,

04302, 04402

ESC 02002, 02102

FERGUSON 00602, 02402

FIDELITY 00002

FINLANDIA 01502, 01602

FINLUX 00002, 00702,

01502, 01602

FIRSTLINE 00402, 00802,

00902, 01402

FISHER 01002, 01602

FUJI 00202, 00302

FUJITSU 00002, 00902

FUNAI 00002

GARRARD 00002

GE 00302, 01202,

02002, 03502,

03702, 03802

GEC 01502

GENERAL 00902

GO VIDEO 02802

GOLDHAND 01402

GOLDSTAR 00402, 01802,

02902, 04202

GOODMANS 00002, 00402,

01402, 02102

GRADIENTE 00002

GRAETZ 00602, 01602,

02002

GRANADA 01502, 01602

GRANDIN 00002, 00402,

01402

GRUNDIG 01402, 01502,

01902, 02502

HANSEATIC 00402

HARLEY DAVIDSON

00002

HARMAN/KARDON

01502

HARWOOD 01402

HCM 01402

HINARI 01402, 02002,

02702

HI-Q 01002

HITACHI 00002, 00402,

00602, 00702,

02002

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

00702

HYPSON 01402

IMPERIAL 00002

INTERFUNK 01502

ITT 00602, 01602,

02002

ITV 00402, 02102

JENSEN 00602

JVC 00602, 00902,

01302

KAISUI 01402

KEC 00402, 02102

KENWOOD 00602, 01302

KLH 01402

KODAK 00302, 00402

KOLIN 00602, 00802

KORPEL 01402

LENCO 02102

LEYCO 01402

LG 00402, 00702,

00902, 02902

LLOYD’S 00002

LOEWE 00402, 01502,

04502

LOGIK 01402, 02002

LUXOR 00802, 01102,

01602

LXI 00402

M ELECTRONIC

00002

MAGNASONIC04302

MAGNAVOX 00002, 00302,

00502, 01502

MAGNIN 02002

MANESTH 00902, 01402

MARANTZ 00302, 01502

MARTA 00402

MATSUI 02602, 02702

MATSUSHITA 00302

MEDION 02602

MEI 00302

MEMOREX 00002, 00302,

00402, 00502,

01002, 01102,

01602, 02002,

02202, 02602,

04202

MEMPHIS 01402

METZ 00402, 02502,

04502

MGA 00802, 02002

MGN TECHNOLOGY

02002

MINOLTA 00702

MITSUBISHI 00602, 00802,

01302, 01502,

03502

MOTOROLA 00302, 01102

MTC 00002, 02002

MULTITECH 00002, 01402

MURPHY 00002

MYRYAD 01502

NAD 01602

NATIONAL 01902

NEC 00302, 00402,

00602, 01102,

01302, 01602

NECKERMANN

01502

NESCO 01402

NEWAVE 00402

NIKKO 00402

NOBLEX 02002

NOKIA 00602, 01602,

02002

NORDMENDE 00602, 02402

OCEANIC 00002, 00602

OKANO 02302, 02602

OLYMPUS 00302, 01902

OPTIMUS 00402, 01102,

01602, 02802

ORION 01702, 02602,

02702, 04402

OSAKI 00002, 00402,

01402

OTTO VERSAND

01502

PALLADIUM 00402, 00602,

01402

PANASONIC 00302, 01802,

01902, 03102,

03702, 04502

PATHE MARCONI

00602

PENNEY 00302, 00402,

00702, 02002,

03702, 04202

PENTAX 00702

PERDIO 00002

PHILCO 00302

PHILIPS 00302, 01502,

03202, 03902,

04002

PHONOLA 01502

PILOT 00402

PIONEER 00702, 01302,

01502

POLK AUDIO 01502

PROFITRONIC 02002

PROLINE 00002

PROSCAN 01202, 03802

PROTEC 01402

PULSAR 00502

PYE 01502

QUASAR 00302, 03702

QUELLE 01502

RADIOLA 01502

RADIOSHACK 00002

RADIX 00402

RANDEX 00402

RCA 00302, 00702,

01202, 02002,

03502, 03702,

03802

REALISTIC 00002, 00302,

00402, 01002,

01102, 01602

REOC 02602

REPLAYTV 03002, 03102

REX 00602

ROADSTAR 00402, 01402,

02002, 02102

RUNCO 00502

SABA 00602, 02402

SALORA 00802

SAMPO 00402, 01102

SAMSUNG 00902, 02002,

02802

SANKY 00502, 01102

SANSUI 00002, 00602,

01302, 04402

SANYO 01002, 01602,

02002

SAVILLE 02702

SBR 01502

SCHAUB LORENZ

00002, 00602,

01602

SCHNEIDER 00002, 01402,

01502

SCOTT 00802, 00902,

01702

SEARS 00002, 00302,

00402, 00702,

01002, 01602,

04202

SEG 02002

SEI 01502

SELECO 00602

SEMP 00902

viii

APPENDIX

SHARP 01102, 03502

SHINTOM 01402, 01602

SIEMENS 00402, 01502,

01602

SILVA 00402

SINGER 00902, 01402

SINUDYNE 01502

SONIC BLUE 03002, 03102

SONTEC 00402

SONY 00002, 00102,

00202, 00302,

03302, 04102

STS 00702

SUNKAI 02602

SUNSTAR 00002

SUNTRONIC 00002

SYLVANIA 00002, 00302,

00802, 01502

SYMPHONIC 00002

TANDY 00002, 01602

TASHIKO 00002, 00402

TATUNG 00002, 00602,

00902, 01302,

01502

TEAC 00002, 00602,

02102, 02202,

03402

TECHNICS 00302, 01902

TECO 00302, 00402,

00602, 01102

TEKNIKA 00002, 00302,

00402

TELEAVIA 00602

TELEFUNKEN 00602, 02402

TENOSAL 01402

TENSAI 00002

THOMAS 00002

THOMSON 00602, 01202,

01302, 02402

THORN 00602, 01602

TIVO 03202, 03302

TMK 02002

TOSHIBA 00602, 00802,

00902, 01302,

01502, 03602

TOTEVISION 00402, 02002

UHER 02002

UNITECH 02002

UNIVERSUM 00002, 00402,

01502, 02002

VECTOR 00902

VICTOR 00602, 01302

VIDEO CONCEPTS

00902

VIDEOMAGIC 00402

VIDEOSONIC 02002

VILLAIN 00002

WARDS 00002, 00302,

00702, 01002,

01102, 01202,

01402, 01502,

02002

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

01402

XR-1000 00002, 00302,

01402

YAMAHA 00602

YAMISHI 01402

YOKAN 01402

YOKO 02002

ZENITH 00002, 00202,

00502, 04402

CABLE

ABC 00103, 00203

AMERICAST 02003

BELL SOUTH 02003

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

00803

BRITISH TELECOM

00103

DAERYUNG 00203, 01403,

01903

DIRECTOR 01303

FILMNET 01203

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

00103, 00803,

01303, 01703

GOLDSTAR 00503

HAMLIN 00303, 00703

JERROLD 00103, 00803,

01303, 01703

LG 00503

MEMOREX 00003

MNET 01203

MOTOROLA 00803, 01303,

01703, 02303

NOOS 01803

PACE 00603, 02203

PANASONIC 00003, 00203,

00403

PARAGON 00003

PHILIPS 01003, 01103

PIONEER 00503, 01603,

01903

PULSAR 00003

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

00103

QUASAR 00003

RCA 02403, 02503

REGAL 00703, 00903

RUNCO 00003

SAGEM 01803

SAMSUNG 00003, 00503

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

00203, 01403,

01903

SONY 02103

STARCOM 00103

SUPERCABLE 00803

TELE+1 01203

TORX 00103

TOSHIBA 00003

TRANS PX 00803

TS 00103

UNITED CABLE

00103

ZENITH 00003, 01503,

02003

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 06404

ABSAT 00104

ALBA 01404

ALPHASTAR 02504

AMSTRAD 03004

ASTON 00304, 05004

ASTRO 00604

ATSAT 06404

AVALON 01304

BLAUPUNKT 00604

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

03004, 05204

CANAL DIGITAL

03104

CANAL SATELLITE

03104

CANAL+ 03104

CHAPARRAL 00804

CITYCOM 05304

CONNEXIONS 01304

CROSSDIGITAL

04604

CYRUS 00704

DAERYUNG 01304

DAEWOO 06304

D-BOX 02104, 04904

DIGENIUS 01104

DIRECTV 00904, 01204,

01504, 01704,

02204, 02304,

02804, 04104,

04604, 05104,

06904

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

02604, 03704

DISHPRO 02604, 03704

DISTRATEL 00004

DMT 04004

DNT 00704, 01304

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

05804

ECHOSTAR 00504, 01304,

01604, 02604,

03104, 03604,

03704, 04304

ENGEL 03804

EXPRESSVU 02604

FINLUX 01404

FOXTEL 07004, 07104,

07204, 07304,

07404

FRACARRO 03604

FTE 03404

FUBA 01304

GALAXIS 03404, 04704

GE 01504

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

03504

GOI 02604

GOLD BOX 03104

GRUNDIG 00604, 03004

HIRSCHMANN00604, 01304

HITACHI 01404, 02804

HTS 02604

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

02304, 05104,

06904

HUMAX 03404, 05304

INVIDEO 03604

JVC 02604

KATHREIN 00104, 00604,

00704, 01004,

01804, 05604

KREISELMEYER

00604

LABGEAR 06304

LOGIX 03804

LORENZEN 01104

MAGNAVOX 02004, 02204

MANHATTAN 01404, 03804,

04204

MARANTZ 00704

MEDIASAT 03104

MEMOREX 02204

METRONIC 00004

MITSUBISHI 02304

MOTOROLA 03504

MYRYAD 00704

NEXT LEVEL 03504

NOKIA 01404, 02104,

02404, 04904,

05704, 06804

OCTALTV 03704

ORBITECH 04504

PACE 01404, 03004,

05204, 06604

PANASONIC 00904, 01904,

03004, 06504

PANDA 01404

PAYSAT 02204

PHILIPS 00204, 00704,

01404, 02004,

02204, 02304,

03104, 04104,

05104, 06904

PIONEER 03104

PROMAX 01404

PROSCAN 01204, 01504

RADIOLA 00704

RADIOSHACK 03504

RADIX 01304

RCA 00404, 01204,

01504, 03204

RFT 00704

SABRE 01404

SAGEM 02904, 04804,

05904

SAMSUNG 03804, 04604,

06004, 06204

SAT CONTROL06404

SATSTATION 04204

SCHWAIGER 04704

SEEMANN 01304

SIEMENS 00604

SKY 03004, 03304,

05204

SM ELECTRONIC

05404

SONY 01704, 03004,

06704

STAR CHOICE 03504

STRONG 06404

TANTEC 01404

TECHNISAT 04404, 04504

TELESTAR 04504

THOMSON 01404, 03104,

03904, 06104

TOPFIELD 05504

TOSHIBA 02304, 02704,

06904

TPS 02904, 05904

ULTIMATETV 01204, 01704

UNIDEN 02004, 02204

UNIVERSUM 00604

VENTANA 00704

WISI 00604, 01304,

01404

XSAT 00104

ZEHNDER 04004

ZENITH 03304

CD PLAYER

AIWA 00605

ARCAM 00605

AUDIO RESEARCH

00605

AUDIO TON 00605

AUDIOLAB 00605

AUDIOMECA 00605

CAIRN 00605

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

00205

CARVER 00605, 00805

CYRUS 00605

DENON 01005

DKK 00005

DMX ELECTRONICS

00605

DYNAMIC BASS

00805

EMERSON 00905

FISHER 00805

GENEXXA 00305, 00905

GOODMANS 00905

GRUNDIG 00605

HARMAN/KARDON

00605, 00705

HITACHI 00305

JVC 00505

KENWOOD 00105, 00405

KRELL 00605

LINN 00605

LXI 00905

MAGNAVOX 00605, 00905

MARANTZ 00205, 00605

MATSUI 00605

MCS 00205

MEMOREX 00905

MERIDIAN 00605

MICROMEGA 00605

MIRO 00005

MISSION 00605

MYRYAD 00605

NAD 00005

NAIM 00605

NSM 00605

OPTIMUS 00005, 00305,

00405, 00805,

00905

PANASONIC 00205

PHILIPS 00605

PIONEER 00305, 00905

POLK AUDIO 00605

PROTON 00605

QED 00605

QUAD 00605

QUASAR 00205

RCA 00305, 00805,

00905

REALISTIC 00805

REVOX 00605

ROTEL 00605

SAE 00605

SANSUI 00605, 00905

SANYO 00805

SCOTT 00905

SEARS 00905

SHARP 00405

SIMAUDIO 00605

SONIC FRONTIERS

00605

SONY 00005

SYMPHONIC 00905

TAG MCLAREN

00605

TANDY 00305

TECHNICS 00205

THORENS 00605

THULE 00605

UNIVERSUM 00605

VICTOR 00505

WARDS 00605

YAMAHA 01105, 01205

CD RECORDER

KENWOOD 01305

MARANTZ 01305

PHILIPS 01305

YAMAHA 01405

BLU-RAY/DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

02806

ALBA 02606

AMSTRAD 02306

APEX DIGITAL02106, 02606,

03006, 03506,

03606, 03706,

04106

BLAUPINKT 02606

BLUE PARADE01006

BUSH 02306

CENTREX 02106

CLATRONIC 03406

CYBERHOME 02406

DAEWOO 03206, 03306

DANSAI 03206

DECCA 03206

DENON 00006

DIAMOND 03106

DIGITREX 02106

DVD2000 00206

EMERSON 01206

ENTERPRISE 01206

FISHER 02006

GE 00306, 02606

GO VIDEO 02506

GOLDSTAR 02906, 04906

GRADIENTE 01806

GREENHILL 02606

GRUNDIG 00706

HITACHI 01106, 01507,

01906

HITEKER 02106

JVC 00906, 01306

KENWOOD 00006, 00606

KLH 02606

KOSS 01806

LG 02906

LIMIT 03106

MAGNAVOX 00106, 02206

MARANTZ 00706

MEMOREX 03806

MICO 02706

MICROSOFT 00306

MINTEK 02606

MITSUBISHI 00206

MUSTEK 02806

NESA 02606

ONKYO 00106, 04806

ORITRON 01806

PALSONIC 02106

PANASONIC 00006, 00007,

00107, 00207,

01606, 04206,

05006

PHILIPS 00106, 00706,

00807, 01706,

03906, 05206

PIONEER 00406, 00407,

00507, 00607,

01006, 01506,

01606, 05306

POLK AUDIO 00706

PROSCAN 00306

QWESTAR 01806

RCA 00306, 01006,

02606, 04806

ROTEL 01306

SAMSUNG 01106, 04506

SANYO 02006

SHARP 01207, 01307,

01406

SHERWOOD 03206

SHINSONIC 00506

SLIM ART 03306

SM ELECTRONIC

02806

SONY 00506, 00907,

01007, 01107,

04006, 05106

SYLVANIA 02206

TATUNG 03206

TEAC 01006, 02606

TECHNICS 00006

THETA DIGITAL

01006

THOMSON 00306

TOSHIBA 00106, 00307,

04606, 04806,

05406

URBAN CONCEPTS

00106

VICTOR 01407

XBOX 00306

YAMAHA 00006, 00706,

00707, 00806,

04306, 04406,

04706

ZENITH 00106, 01206,

02906

ZEUS 03306

LD PLAYER

CARVER 00108

DENON 00008

MARANTZ 00108

MITSUBISHI 00008

NAD 00008

NAGSMI 00008

OPTIMUS 00008

PHILIPS 00108

PIONEER 00008

SALORA 00108

SONY 00208

TELEFUNKEN 00008

YAMAHA 00308

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 00109

ONKYO 00309

SHARP 00209

SONY 00009

YAMAHA 00409, 00509,

00609

RECEIVER (TUNER)

ADC 00710

AIWA 00410, 01210,

03610, 03910,

04410

ALCO 03810

ANAM 04310

APEX DIGITAL01810

AUDIOLAB 01510

AUDIOTRONIC01510

AUDIOVOX 03810

BOSE 01610

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

03310

CAPETRONIC 00710

CARVER 01210, 01510

CENTREX 01810

DENON 03210

FERGUSON 00710

FINE ARTS 01510

GRUNDIG 01510

HARMAN/KARDON

00210, 02610

INTEGRA 00310, 02510

JBL 00210, 02710

JVC 00110, 00710,

03410, 04110

KENWOOD 01010, 03010

KLH 03810, 04010

MAGNAVOX 00710, 01210,

01510, 02110

MARANTZ 00010, 01210,

01510, 02410

MCS 00010

MICROMEGA 01510

MUSICMAGIC 01210

MYRYAD 01510

NAD 00610

NORCENT 03710

ONKYO 00310, 00810,

02510

OPTIMUS 00710, 00910

PANASONIC 00010, 02310,

04210, 04710

PHILIPS 01210, 01510,

01910, 02010,

02110, 02210,

02410

PIONEER 00710, 00910,

03510

POLK AUDIO 02410

PROSCAN 01710

QUASAR 00010

RCA 00710, 00910,

01710, 03810,

04310

SABA 00710

SANSUI 01210

SCHNEIDER 00710

SONY 00410, 01110,

01310, 04510,

04610

STEREOPHONICS

00910

SUNFIRE 03010

TEAC 03810

TECHNICS 00010, 02810,

02910, 04210

TELEFUNKEN 00710

THOMSON 01710

THORENS 01510

UHER 00710

VENTURER 03810

VICTOR 00110

WARDS 00410

YAMAHA 00510, 01410,

03110, 04810,

05510, 05610,

05710, 05810,

05910, 06010

YAMAHA (iPOD)

05310

YAMAHA (TUNER ID1)

04910

YAMAHA (TUNER ID2)

05010

YAMAHA (XM ID1)

05110

YAMAHA (XM ID2)

05210

APPENDIX

TAPE DECK

AIWA 00111

CARVER 00111

GRUNDIG 00111

HARMAN/KARDON

00111

MAGNAVOX 00111

MARANTZ 00111

MYRYAD 00111

OPTIMUS 00011

PHILIPS 00111

PIONEER 00011

POLK AUDIO 00111

RCA 00011

REVOX 00111

SANSUI 00111

SONY 00211

THORENS 00111

WARDS 00011

YAMAHA 00311, 00411

RX-V1900

Printed in Malaysia WP38590

RX-V1900

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V1900_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, June 20, 2008 11:23 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.

Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.

■Front panel / Face avant

RX-V1900

MASTER

PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

MAIN ZONE

INPUT

OFF

INFO

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROLS

MULTI ZONE

MIC

OPTIMIZER

EFFECT

PROGRAM

YPAO

ZONE 3

OPTICAL

ZONE 2

AUDIO

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO

PHONES

BAND

CATEGORYPRESET/TUNING/CH MONO

STEREO/

MODE

MEMORY

STRAIGHT

CONTROLSELECT

AUDIO TONE

ENTER

ON/OFF

CB MA LKIGFEDHJ

QPNO

■Remote control / Boîtier de télécommande

WP38720

Printed in Malaysia

AMP

SOURCE

ZONE

SETUP ID MACRO

MODE

DVD CD

V-AUX DOCKMULTI

PHONO

POWER

TV DVR VCR

SIRIUSTUNER

HD DVD

CD-R

CBL

SAT

SRCH MODE

BAND

TITLE

MEMORY

RETURN

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

MUTE

SYSTEM MEMORY

STANDBY

POWER

SELECT

VOLUME

PRESET/CH

ENTER CAT.

A-E

PRG SELECT

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ENT

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO

SLEEP

MUTE

INPUT

9 0

LEVEL

TV CH

INFO

TV VOL

EXTD SUR.

REC

3D DSP

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

ENHANCER

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

Q R

Yamaha RX V1900 Owner's Manual U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation